Home

Ektron CMS400.NET User Manual - Ektron Product Documentation

1. 74 Scheduling Content to Begin and End 75 Setting a Start Date 75 Setting an End Date on Content 78 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 ii Setting Archive Options 79 Adding a Content Summary 82 Creating Summaries 83 Adding or Editing Metadata 86 Entering Custom Metadata 87 Entering Title and Keywords 91 Approving Declining Content 94 Approve Decline One Content Item 95 Approve Decline Several Content Items 97 Example of an Approval Chain 98 Comparing Versions of Content 104 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content 111 Accessing Content History 111 The Content History Window 113 Restor
2. 209 Library Folder Properties 211 Searching the Library 212 Files 215 Hyperlinks 227 Images 228 Quicklinks and Forms 229 Using Ektron Explorer 232 Installing Ektron Explorer 234 Displaying Ektron Explorer 240 Searching for CMS Content 243 Performing Actions on Content 245 Performing Actions on Folders 251 Inserting External Files into Ektron CMS400 NET 253 Favorites 254 Recently Viewed Content 258 Using the Document Management Functionality 261 Supported Types of Documents 262
3. 381 Creating a Task via the Task Folder 382 Creating a Task from the Web Site 394 Creating a Task via the Content Folder 394 Viewing a Task 395 Editing a Task 400 Adding Comments to Tasks 401 Deleting a Task 404 Viewing a Task s History 405 Task Module Toolbar 406 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 v Updating Your User Profile 407 Online Help 412 Accessing Online Help 412 Accessing Online Manuals 414 Introduction to eWebEditPro XML 417 Creating a Simple Web Page 419 Your Finished Web Page 419 Creating a Sample Web Page
4. 420 Toolbar Buttons 423 Customizing Your Toolbar 436 Removing Or Adding Menus 437 Removing or Adding Menu Items 438 Restoring Toolbars 440 Rearranging the Menus on a Toolbar 440 Creating a New Menu 440 Moving a Menu Off the Toolbar 442 Changing the Menu s Orientation 442 The Context Sensitive Menu 444 Using eWebEditPro XML s Advanced Features 447 Copying from Other Applications 448 Finding and Replacing Text 449 Checking Spelling 453 Editing in Microsoft Word 458 Inserting Images 461 Editing Images 477 Specifying Color Depth
5. 12 Logging Out of the Sample Site 14 The Workarea and Smart Desktop 16 Accessing the Workarea 16 Installing the Document Management Functionality 17 Understanding the Smart Desktop 21 Navigating Within the Smart Desktop 23 Sending Instant Email 29 Working with Folders and Content 32 Workarea Toolbar Buttons 34 Viewing a Folder 37 Viewing Content 40 Expanding the Content Area 44 Adding Content 45 Editing Content 49 Deleting Content 52 Searching the Workarea 55 Adding Subfolders 72 Deleting Folders
6. 508 Introduction to Tables 509 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus 513 Manipulating Your Table s Format 520 Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns 520 Specifying Table Width 522 Specifying Horizontal Alignment 526 Table Backgrounds 528 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 vi Setting Table Borders 531 Working with Table Cells 535 Specifying the Width of a Cell 535 Inserting a Cell 536 Deleting a Cell 537 Setting a Cell s Border Color 538 Specifying a Cell s Background Color 539 Specifying a Background Image for a Cell 541 Spanning Rows or Columns 543 Aligning Text Within a Cell 54
7. 144 Overview of Form Processing 146 The Structure of Form Data 146 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 iii Creating a New Form 147 Creating a Form s Content 155 Form Validation 161 Form Fields 162 Implementing a Form on a Web Page 184 Assigning a Task to a Form 184 Viewing Form Reports 187 Viewing Form Information 192 Editing a Form 198 Deleting a Form 200 View Form Toolbar 200 Creating Polls and Surveys 202 Library Folder 208 Terms Used in this Chapter 208 Accessing The Library
8. Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 274 11 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if the content should be searchable 12 Click the Check in or Submit for Publishing button See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 269 and Adding Content on page 45 13 The selected files are imported into DM Editing a Managed File After a managed file is stored in DM follow these steps to edit it 1 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the managed file s folder Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 287 3 From the View Contents of Folder screen click the managed file 4 The Content tab displays the file name and a button to let you view the file within its host application 5 If you want to view the file before editing it click the View read only Asset button If you do the file opens for display purposes only 6 To edit the file click the Edit button 7 The following screen appears 8 To open the managed file in the host application click Edit in App Then make your changes save it in the host application and click either the Check in or Submit for Publishing button Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 288 If you want to s
9. which menus are available to you which buttons appear on each menu and the sequence in which they appear initially whether or not you are authorized to customize your toolbar If you are not authorized your edits are not saved when you leave the eWebEditPro XML screen If you are authorized to customize your toolbar there are several ways to do so Removing Or Adding Menus on page 437 Removing or Adding Menu Items on page 438 Restoring Toolbars on page 440 Rearranging the Menus on a Toolbar on page 440 Creating a New Menu on page 440 Moving a Menu Off the Toolbar on page 442 Changing the Menu s Orientation on page 442 Each procedure is explained below Customizing Your Toolbar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 437 Removing Or Adding Menus To remove or add a menu follow these steps 1 Place the cursor on the toolbar 2 Right click the mouse 3 A dropdown list appears It displays all menus available to you and the Customize option NOTE If Customize does not appear on the menu you are not authorized to customize the toolbar Menus that are checked appear on your toolbar In the above example the Special Characters View As Format and Paragraph Format menus appear The Table Position Objects and Text Directions menus which are not checked are available but do
10. 1 Choose a content folder 2 From the content type drop down box choose Forms Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 206 3 From the language drop down select the language in which to create the form 4 Click the Add button The New Form screen appears NOTE When you choose Standard Poll or Blank Survey the amount of steps in the Forms Wizard changes from five steps to four steps This happens because the Assign Tasks step is removed 5 Choose Blank Survey You can click the preview icon next to any sample form to preview it before choosing it 6 Click the Next button 7 Enter or edit the form s Title and Description Title used to reference the survey within the Workarea required Description an extended description of the survey 8 Click the Next button 9 This screen lets you determine what happens after the site visitor completes the survey The choices are Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 207 Display a message See Composing the Postback Message on page 150 Redirect to a file or page Identify a file or a page on your Web site that is launched when the visitor completes the form An example of a file is a white paper a common file format is PDF that the visitor requested An example of a page is one that lets the visitor do
11. Adding a Calendar Event on page 369 Understanding Event Types on page 373 Viewing a Calendar Event on page 375 Editing Calendar Events on page 376 Deleting Calendar Events on page 379 Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 359 Understanding Calendars Before working with calendars you should understand the following points Ektron CMS400 NET supports several calendars at one time There might be a site wide calendar and other calendars for special interests such as an athletic events calendar Each date can display several events Only system administrators can create a calendar Each calendar is assigned to a content folder See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 32 Your ability to view add edit and remove calendar events is determined by your permissions for that folder The following illustrates the workflow of calendar tasks Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 360 Accessing the View Calendar Screen The View Calendar screen collects general information about a calendar and provides toolbar buttons that let you perform calendar related activities To access the View Calendar screen follow these steps 1 Access the Modules folder from the lower left corner of the Workarea Working with Calendars
12. Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Item on page 329 External hyperlink Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 330 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 331 Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 333 Adding New Content to a Menu via Navigation Link on a Web Page NOTE You can only use this feature after your Web developer has modified a page template to display the menu This procedure is described in the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer Manual section Custom ASP Functions gt Menus To add new content to a menu via a navigation link on a Web page follow these steps 1 Access the Web page that contains the link to display the menu 2 Place the mouse on the hyperlink that causes the menu to appear 3 The menu appears 4 Click Add Content NOTE The Add Content option lets you only add new content to a menu You cannot add another type of menu item using this button 5 A screen displays the name of the current folder and its subfolders To create the new content in the current folder click Next To create it in subfolder click it 6 The Add Content screen opens allowing you to enter information Enter all information in the Add Content screen and click the Publish button See Also Adding Content on page 45 7 The content is added to the menu Editing a Menu You can edit a
13. When deciding how to align a picture you need to become familiar with these terms Inserting Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 472 baseline of text the imaginary line on which the text lies Some letters such as g p and y have descenders segments of letters that extend below the baseline bottom of text the lowest section of a line to which a descender extends top of text the highest spot of a line to which any segment of a letter extends vertical center the midpoint between the top and bottom of the line The following table lists your alignment choices To align Click this in the Alignment field Illustration The picture on the left margin allowing subsequent text to wrap around it Left The picture on the right margin allowing subsequent text to wrap around it Right The top of the picture with the top of the text Text Top Top The vertical center of the picture with the baseline of the text Middle The vertical center of the picture with the vertical center of the text AbsMiddle Inserting Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 473 Resetting Width Height Border Thickness and Alignment If you adjust the picture s width height border thickness and or alignment and later want to restore all of those settings to their original values click the Reset button Note that you cannot sel
14. 3 Click the bullet button 4 Notice that the line is indented and now begins with a bullet Creating a Simple Web Page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 422 Changing the Size of Text 1 Press lt Enter gt to move the cursor down to the next line 2 Type Finally you can change the font to a large size 3 Select the words large size 4 Click the down arrow to the right of the font size list When you do the list of available fonts appears 5 Click 5 18 pt 6 Notice that large size is now much larger than the other text Congratulations You have just created your first Web page with eWebEditPro XML You have learned how to apply bold italic and underlining create a hyperlink add a bullet to a line and change the size of the text This sample used only a few of the many features available The following sections explain the rest of the details about using the product Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 423 Toolbar Buttons This section explains how to use the buttons and drop down lists on the toolbar The toolbar is the row of buttons across the top of the editor window illustrated below The buttons let you perform functions such as cutting and pasting text inserting images and creating tables All buttons may not appear Your Webmaster determines which buttons appear on your toolbar Also you can customize you
15. Add Content In a content folder opens the editor and allows you to create new content See Also Adding Content on page 45 Add Content Folder In a content folder allows you to create a subfolder to further organize your content See Also Adding Subfolders on page 72 Add Library Item In the library folder allows you to upload an image or file or add a hyperlink or Quicklink to use in content See Also Library Folder on page 208 Add Task Assign task to a user See Also Managing Tasks on page 381 Approvals View approval chain for folder or content See Also Approving Declining Content on page 94 Approve Approve content that awaits your approval Approve All In the approvals folder approves all content awaiting your approval with one click Archived Content If current content is being displayed switch to display archived content If archived content is being displayed switch to display current content See Also Setting Archive Options on page 79 Back Return to previous screen Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 35 Calendar Lets you choose when content will go live See Also Working with Calendars on page 357 Cancel Cancels action you are performing without saving the information Check in Saves and checks in content you are working on See Also Checked In Content on page
16. Adding a Task Category and Task Type Task Categories and Task Types let users and administrators sort task by user defined categories and types By clicking the Add link located next to the Task Type drop down box you can add Task Categories and Task Types This allows you to add categories and types without leaving the Add Task screen NOTE Administrators can also add and edit Task Categories and Task Types from the Workarea by clicking Settings gt Configurations gt Task Types See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrators Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Categories and Types To add a Task Category and a Task Type follow these steps 1 Go to the Add Task screen as described in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 383 2 Click the Add link next to the Task Type dropdown box 3 The Add Task Type screen appears Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 390 From this screen you can perform the following Add a task type to an existing task category Create a new task category Add a new task type Add a task type description Define task type availability NOTE As a user if you set the Task type to Not Available you cannot edit the Task Type after that To make the Task Type available see your administrator Task Type availability is explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrators Manual gt Managing Tas
17. After reviewing the content the EditorInChief decides it is great and publishes it At this point the content becomes live on the Web site and the approval chain is complete The user who created the content receives an email notifying him that it was published Button Description Publish Publish the content Decline 1 Sends an email to the creator notifying him her that content was declined 2 Removes content from the approval chain Edit Invokes the editor The approver changes the content Comparing Versions of Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 104 Comparing Versions of Content The View Content Difference feature highlights changes that were made to selected content Below is an example of the View Content Difference screen showing two versions of content The changes are indicated by redlining deleted content highlighting in yellow added content Within the View Content Difference feature you can perform several tasks as well as view different versions of the content separately or compared The View Content Difference feature is explained through the following topics When Can I Compare Content on page 105 The Compare Content Window on page 105 First Use of the View Content Difference Feature on page 110 Comparing Versions of Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revis
18. Approvals Reports User and user group setup Wherever instant email is available one of the email icons appears Modifying Instant eMail When the email screen appears the following information is copied from Ektron CMS400 NET into the email Field Source of Default Information Editable To User you selected to receive the email If the user does not have valid email address an error message appears on the screen see below If you then insert a valid email address the email is sent If you specify a group to receive the message as long as one group member has a valid email address all group members with valid addresses receive the email Yes If desired you can add recipients by typing them into this field From You No Subject If the email message is linked to content its title appears Yes Body of message If the email message is linked to content a link to the content appears Yes Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 32 Working with Folders and Content Every content item resides in the Content folder or one of its subfolders So to work with existing content or create a new content you must first navigate to its folder A typical content folder screen appears below It consists of three sections The top left frame shows the folder structure You can click any folder to display its content in the r
19. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 276 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual chapter Web Alert Feature 7 If desired edit the document s properties See Also Editing a Document s Properties on page 268 8 Check in or submit the content for publishing as you would any content block See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 269 Working with Open Office Files This section explains how to work with Open Office files through the following subtopics Creating a New Open Office File on page 276 Importing One Open Office File on page 276 Importing Several Open Office Documents on page 279 Editing Open Office Files on page 281 Creating a New Open Office File You cannot create an Open Office file within Ektron CMS400 NET You must create it in Open Office then import it into Ektron CMS400 NET Once the file is in Ektron CMS400 NET you can edit it from there See Also Editing Open Office Files on page 281 Importing One Open Office File Your computer or network may have Open Office files that you want to manage using DM Follow these steps to import any document into Ektron s Document Management functionality See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 274 and The Work Offline Option on page 275 NOTE In addition to the procedure described below you can also drag and
20. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 361 2 Click the Calendars folder 3 The Calendar Modules screen appears It lists all calendars in Ektron CMS400 NET NOTE Only system administrators can create a new calendar 4 Click a calendar 5 The View Calendar screen appears showing information about the calendar Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 362 Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 363 The following table explains the fields on the View Calendar screen Field Description Title Title given to the calendar The title identifies the calendar within the Workarea ID ID number automatically assigned to calendar This is used to display the calendar on a Web page Description Description given to the calendar Location Label Label for the calendar s location information This label appears on the calendar when a location is assigned to a calendar event Start Time Label Label for the calendar s start time This appears on the calendar when a start time is assigned to a calendar event End Time Label Label for the calendar s end time data This appears on the calendar when an end time is assigned to a calendar event Table Properties Display Weekends A green check means the calendar displays every day of the week A red X means the calend
21. External hyperlinks Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 330 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 331 Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 328 4 Click Edit Menu 5 In the View Language dropdown list select the language of the menu 6 Click the Add Item button 7 The Add Menu screen displays a list of items you can add to the menu 8 Use to the table below to select the type of menu item and follow the steps to add that menu item Adding Content as a Menu Item To add content as a menu item follow these steps Assign this type of content to the menu For details see Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 328 Any library assets images files Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Item on page 329 External hyperlinks Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 330 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 331 Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 329 1 Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 325 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 326 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page on page 327 NOTE You can only add content that resides in the menu s content folde
22. Locks selected table or image at its current screen position Nothing can move a locked object To move the object unlock it by clicking this button again Move to Front If two or more images overlay each other moves the selected image in front of the others Move to Back If two or more images overlay each other moves the selected image behind the others Above Text If text overlays an image move the image in front of the text Below Text If an image overlays text move the text in front of the image Toolbar Buttons Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 432 The text buttons determine the editing direction while the edit buttons determine the side of the editor that displays the scroll bar For right to left languages such as Arabic Farsi and Hebrew the text editing would be right to left and the scroll bar would be on the left side For western European languages the text editing would be left to right and the scroll bar would be on the right side Form Elements Toolbar See Inserting Form Fields on page 158 Table Elements Toolbar Button Function Left Right Text Text is entered left to right Right Left Text Text is entered right to left Left Right Edit The vertical scroll bar appears on the right side of the window Right Left Edit The vertical scroll bar appears on the left side of the window Toolbar button Description For more
23. This buttons appears if you are the next approver in the approval list Click it to decline the changes made to the content Note If content has any active tasks a comments window pops up You can insert comments to describe how approving or declining the content affects the task Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 161 Next click the Save and Submit or Publish button The form only appears on your Web site after it is published After you complete and save the form it may need to go through the approval process When that is complete add it to the site by assigning it to a page template See Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 184 Form Validation You can apply validation rules while creating or editing the following field types text password textarea calendar Validation rules ensure that the form information entered by site visitors meets your criteria For example a validation rule can specify that a site visitor s response to the Telephone field conforms to a standard format for example 7 or 10 digits If the response does not conform an error message informs the site visitor of the problem The input must conform before the form can be submitted For a list of validation rule types see Validation Options on page 167 When Validation Rules are Applied Validation rules are applied when a site visit
24. on page 450 Considering the Case of a Search Term on page 451 Whole Word Match on page 452 Specifying a Search Direction The search begins where the cursor is when you click Find Next To make sure you locate every occurrence of a term place the cursor at the top of the content before beginning the search If you begin the search from somewhere other than the top of the page use the Direction field to search from the current location to the top or bottom of the file Finding and Replacing Text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 451 Considering the Case of a Search Term By default the search ignores the case upper or lower of a search term In other words if you enter Bob in the Find What field the search finds bob Bob BOB etc If you want the search to be case sensitive use the Match case check box on the Find window If you enter Bob in the Find What field and place a check in the Match case box the search only To search from the cursor location to the Click this option in the Direction field end of the page Down top of the page Up Finding and Replacing Text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 452 stops at Bob not bob or BOB Whole Word Match By default the search finds any occurrence of the text that you type into the Find what field For example if you enter the the search finds the word the as
25. 4 Select Managed Files 5 The default language appears in the View dropdown list To save the managed file under a different language click the dropdown list and select the language 6 Click the Add Content button Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 284 7 The Edit Content screen opens as shown below 8 Click the Browse button 9 Browse through your computer and network to the file you want to import When you do the file s path appears within the File field 10 Insert a Title 11 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if the content should be searchable 12 If desired add a summary metadata a schedule and comments See Also Adding a Content Summary on page 82 Adding or Editing Metadata on page 86 Managing Tasks on page 381 Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 75 13 Click the appropriate button to either check in or publish the file See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 269 and Adding Content on page 45 14 A window appears indicating that the file is being uploaded to the DM server Importing Several Managed Files To import several managed files into DM follow these steps Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 285
26. Click the mouse button and drag a rectangle in which to insert the text NOTE Make sure the rectangle is large enough to accommodate your text The rectangle disappears after you enter text 4 Type the text 5 Click outside the rectangle to close it 6 To change the text or its font size style color etc place the cursor over the text and right click the mouse The text attributes dialog appears Dialog Box Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 505 The following table lists functions you can perform with this dialog To change this Use this tab field font Font Attributes Font font size Font Attributes Size font style bold italic etc Font Attributes Style underlining Font Attributes Underline strikeout for example sample Font Attributes Strikethrough font color Color Attributes Primary Color text Text Attributes white box if text wraps when it reaches the end of a line Text Attributes Wrap Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 506 Twain Acquire Standard Toolbar Button Description Perform a single page scan from a previously selected source See Also Twain Source on page 506 Importing Scanned Images WebImageFX lets you acquire images from a scanner or digital camera that supports the Twain standard You select the source using Twain Source and do a quick acquire f
27. Display the times for the event Check this box if you want the calendar to display the event s start and end times illustrated below The time also appears on the event detail if this box is checked Hyperlink You can link a Web page to this calendar event The Web page could contain more information about the event directions to it etc If you insert a hyperlink when this event appears on the calendar the reader can click the event to jump to that page To enter any page on the internet enter its Web address For example www ektron com To link to content on your Web site click the library button This type of link is known as a Quicklink The Quicklinks dialog appears and you can navigate to the content The last published version of linked content appears If content has never been published nothing appears If you select a hyperlink the title of the selected content replaces any text in the Event Title field You can edit the new title if desired Launch link in a new browser Check this box if you want the Web page or Quicklink specified in the Hyperlink field to appear in a new browser window when someone clicks it If you do not check this box the new Web page replaces the current one when the link is clicked Field Description Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 373 6 Click Save Understanding Event Types Your system admin
28. See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 274 and Drag and Drop File Uploading vs the Add Content Buttons on page 291 1 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the folder in which you want to place the files See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 32 3 Click the down arrow next to the add dropdown list to view the document types you can add 4 Select Managed Files 5 The default language appears in the View dropdown list To save the managed files under a different language open the dropdown list and select the language 6 Click the Add Several Files button 7 The View Contents of Folder screen splits in two resembling Windows Explorer The left section displays the folder structure of your PC and its network drives The right section displays the contents of the current folder Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 286 8 In the left frame navigate to the folder that contains the files you want import 9 In the right frame click the checkbox next to each file you want to import You can only import files in the selected folder NOTE If you select both Office documents and managed files the Office documents are imported as Office documents and others are imported as managed files 10 In the Title field enter a title for all imported files See Also
29. can have a task assigned to them appear on content reports Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 262 update the Smart Desktop listing of files awaiting approval checked out tasks to expire When a file is imported to the CMS then saved a copy of it is saved to the asset management server Then whenever a user edits and saves the file a new copy is stored In this way you can review and if needed restore a prior version This chapter explains the Document Management Functionality through the following topics Supported Types of Documents on page 262 Security on page 264 Working with Microsoft Office Documents on page 265 Working with Managed Files on page 282 Importing Files via Drag and Drop on page 288 Document Workflow on page 291 Viewing Documents within the CMS on page 292 Deleting a Document on page 293 Approving Documents on page 293 Adding Documents to Collections and Menus on page 293 Document Reports on page 293 Supported Types of Documents Microsoft Office 2000 or later documents Word Excel Powerpoint Project Publisher Visio etc All Open Office extensions odf odt odp odg ods odb Managed files any Windows executable file such as zip files PD
30. on page 382 Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 383 Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 389 Accessing the Tasks Folder To access the Tasks folder follow these steps 1 Access your Smart Desktop as explained in Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 21 2 The Smart Desktop folders appear in the top left frame 3 Click the Tasks folder The following subfolders appear Assigned To Me tasks assigned to you Assigned By Me tasks you assigned to someone else Created By Me tasks you created Assigned To User search for tasks assigned to a user Not Started tasks whose state is set to not started Active tasks whose state is set to Active Awaiting Data tasks whose state is set to Awaiting Data On Hold tasks whose state is set to On Hold Pending tasks whose state is set to Pending Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 383 Reopened tasks whose state is set to Reopened Complete tasks whose state is set to Complete You can click any folder to view only tasks in that category Also the View Tasks screen appears in the right frame listing all tasks assigned to you or assigned by you From this page you can view sort update or add tasks To learn more about the View Tasks screen see Viewing a Task on page 395 To learn about sor
31. 6 Click the Save button With the menu added you may assign menu items to it See Adding a Menu Item on page 325 Adding a Menu via the Menus Module 1 From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus Template Link Note This field applies to content only It has no effect on other types of menu items such as images If you want to apply a template to this menu enter the template here If you do all content on this menu use this template when selected from the menu If you do not enter a template here the content on this menu uses the template specified in its Quicklink Overriding the Template Link You can override the menu template for any content item on this menu and instead use the template specified in its Quicklink To do so follow these steps 1 Add all items to the menu See Adding a Menu Item on page 325 2 Go to the View Menus option 3 Click More Info 4 Click the menu item you want to change 5 At the Link field change the value from Menu Template to Quicklink Important If you created menus prior to upgrading to this version of Ektron CMS400 NET those menu items are assigned as Quicklinks You cannot change them to template links simply by entering a template link here Instead you must go to each menu item and change the Link field value from QuickLink to Menu Template as illustrated above Description Add a more detailed description for t
32. Archive Options Restoring Content from Archived to Active State To restore content from archived state to active follow these steps 1 Navigate to its folder 2 If necessary click the Archive button to view it See Archive Options on page 80 3 Click the Edit button Option Can site visitors view content upon expiration Can users view and edit content within Ektron CMS400 NET upon expiration Archive and remove from site expire No Yes within its folder by clicking the archive button Note If this option is assigned to content it only moves into the archived area of its folder after a site visitor accesses the host Web page Archive and remain on Site Yes The content will not appear on a page that uses the ListSummary function but will appear wherever the ArchiveListSummary function is used Yes within its folder by clicking the archive button Note If this option is assigned to content it only moves into the archived area of its folder after a site visitor accesses the host Web page Add to CMS Refresh Report Yes Yes in the active area of its folder and on the Refresh Report See Also Refresh Reminder Report on page 133 Scheduling Content to Begin and End Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 81 4 Click the Schedule tab 5 Remove the End Date or change it to a future date 6 Submit the content for publis
33. Click the New Hyperlink button The Hyperlink dialog box appears 3 Click in the Link field after http Then enter the address of the destination Web page For example to enter a hyperlink to the ektron Web site enter www ektron com 4 If desired you can use the Target Frame field to change the window in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 556 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 5 Click OK Testing a Hyperlink Within the eWebEditPro XML editor you can test a hyperlink To do this select the hyperlink then double click it That action launches the Web page assigned to the hyperlink Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page Sometimes the destination Web page contains bookmarks and you want to jump from your page to a bookmark on another page Bookmarks are described in Using Bookmarks on page 553 Using Hyperlinks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 561 To create a hyperlink that jumps to another page s bookmark follow these steps 1 Go to the destination Web page 2 Click the bookmark that you want to jump to For example on the illustration below the text Benefits to Partners jumps to a bookmark further down on the page 3 When you click the bookmark its full address appears in your browser s address bar This bookmark
34. Keystroke None Make text appear in Subscript Strikethrough Button None Menu Format gt Strikethrough Keystroke None Make text appear with a Strikethrough Remove Formatting Button None Menu Format gt Strikethrough Keystroke Control Space Removes the formatting of text and returns it to the default color and style Command Access to Command Description Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 591 Format Painter Button Menu Format gt Format Painter Keystroke Control C Paint the formatting of selected text to a new piece of text Highlight the text that has the formatting you want to copy Next click the Format Painter button Then click the text where the formatting is to be applied Command Access to Command Description Appendix A Content Statuses Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 592 Appendix A Content Statuses The table below describes all possible content statuses The rest of this appendix explains each status in more detail Letter Border Color Meaning Content state More Information A green Approved Through the workflow and published on the Web site Active Content on page 593 O red Checked Out Currently being edited Has not been checked in Checked Out Content on page 596 I green Checked In Checked in for other user
35. Security 264 Working with Microsoft Office Documents 265 Working with Open Office Files 276 Working with Managed Files 282 Importing Files via Drag and Drop 288 Document Workflow 291 Viewing Documents within the CMS 292 Deleting a Document 293 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 iv Approving Documents 293 Adding Documents to Collections and Menus 293 Document Reports 293 Working with Collections 295 Finding Collections 296 Viewing a Collection 299 Creating a Collection 301 Editing Content in a Collection 309 Reordering Collections List 310 Ed
36. See Also The Picture Properties Dialog Box on page 468 Adjusting a Picture on page 469 Pixels on page 470 Setting a Border on page 470 Aligning the Picture on page 471 Resetting Width Height Border Thickness and Alignment on page 473 Adding Space around the Picture on page 473 Editing the Picture s Title on page 474 The Options Button on page 474 The Picture Properties Dialog Box Inserting Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 469 You can also use the Picture Properties dialog box to adjust the picture s width height border thickness and alignment reset the image s properties width height border thickness and alignment to their original specifications set spacing between the picture and surrounding information on the page enter or edit the picture s title view technical information about your connection Adjusting a Picture The layout area of the Picture Properties dialog box lets you adjust a picture s width height border thickness and alignment You can use the following fields to adjust the picture before inserting it into the editor To make this change Use this field The width of the picture in pixels Width The height of the picture in pixels Height Add a border around the picture Border Thickness For
37. The Delete command lets you permanently delete obsolete content from your Web site You can only delete content if its status is Approved Like publishing deleted content must go through the approval chain before it is removed If you are the last approver in the approval chain the content is deleted immediately See Also Approving Declining Content on page 94 You can delete a single content item or several content items in a folder Both procedures are explained below Deleting a Single Content Item To delete one content item follow these steps Deleting Content from a Web Page To delete content from a Web page follow these steps 1 Sign in 2 Browse to the content you want to delete 3 Click the Delete button 4 The View Content screen for the selected content appears See Viewing Content on page 40 5 Click the Delete button 6 The following message appears 7 Click OK to delete the content Deleting Content from the Workarea Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 54 1 Access the View Content screen for the content you want to delete as described in Viewing Content on page 40 2 Click the Delete button 3 The following message appears 4 Click OK to delete the content Deleting Several Content Items in a Folder On the View Content Folder screen you can delete several content
38. Working with Collections on page 295 Restore Restores previously published content See Also Viewing and Restoring Previous Content on page 111 Save Saves content that was modified Search Searches content and library folder screens See Also Searching the Library on page 212 Show Calendar Displays the calendar in the Workarea Submit Saves and submits content to next approver in the approval chain Update Changes are saved and content is updated View Date View all calendar events for a selected day View Difference Opens the View Content Difference feature See Also Comparing Versions of Content on page 104 Button Name Description Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 37 Viewing a Folder To view any folder under the content folder follow these steps 1 Access the Workarea as described in Site Preview on page 12 2 Click Content from the left lower side of the Workarea View History View history of selected content See Also Viewing and Restoring Previous Content on page 111 View Published Displays currently published version of content View Staged Displays staged content See Also Staged Content on page 599 Select language Selects the language of the content being displayed Select file type Select the type of files to work with Button Name Description
39. adding to menu 438 rearranging on menu 439 removing from menu 438 text displaying in title bar 410 C calendars add event button 34 authorization for creating 359 button to display in Workarea 36 definition 357 event types 373 events adding 369 assigning event types 373 button for viewing 36 deleting 379 display times 372 editing 376 end time 371 insert hyperlink 372 location 371 recurring adding 373 start date 371 374 start time 371 viewing 375 screen information on 361 viewing 365 cell properties toolbar button 433 cells background color 539 background image deleting 542 inserting 541 border color 538 invisible 538 deleting 537 inserting 536 merging 549 padding 551 spacing 551 splitting 548 text alignment 545 width 535 check in toolbar button 35 check out toolbar button 35 checked in content definition 594 report 129 checked out content definition 596 report 130 choose color WebImageFX command 485 choose font WebImageFX command 486 cleaning HTML 565 collaboration content 577 collections adding content 305 changing sequence of links 36 compared with menu and List Summary 314 creating 301 creating new content block for 307 default template 303 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 ii definition 295 deleting 311 editing content blocks 309 finding 296 folder using to find collection 298 information editing 311 multi language 312 rem
40. any summary metadata schedule comment and task information applies to that file only If you import several at once you are not required to assign a title If you do not assign a title the file s title is the same as its name including the extension For example Proposal for Town Manager PDF If you do assign a title to several files appended to the title in parentheses is the original file name including the extension So for example if you import three personnel forms at once and assign them the title Personnel the titles might look like this Personnel Vacation Request doc Personnel Direct Deposit Form doc Personnel Absence Report Form doc Also any summary metadata schedule comment or task information you enter applies to all files So it would be efficient to enter this kind of information if it applies to all or even most of the files For example if you are importing 10 files and eight have the same metadata insert the metadata before checking them in Then change the metadata for the remaining two After you check in or publish these files you can edit the summary metadata schedule comment or task information by selecting the files individually Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 275 The Work Offline Option After creating or editing a document you can save it to your local computer instead of the document s
41. cell 551 spanning table columns 543 table rows 543 special characters inserting 428 spell check automatic toolbar and menu option 426 manual toolbar and menu option 426 spelling check a single word 455 check as you type 453 check on demand 454 check selected text 455 checking file addresses 456 checking Internet addresses 456 checking uppercase words 456 checking words with numbers 456 fix errors 454 split cell toolbar button 433 splitting a cell 548 staged content block viewing 37 stale content report 136 start date content block setting 75 setting results 77 start time event calendar 371 Strikethrough toolbar and menu option 430 style class assigning to text 429 submenus adding as menu item 331 adding items 331 definition 318 deleting 350 submit toolbar button 36 submitted content definition 596 Subscript toolbar and menu option 430 summary adding 82 content creating for existing content block 84 creating for new content block 83 editing 84 Superscript toolbar and menu option 430 T table insert toolbar button 432 table properties toolbar button 433 tables alignment 526 background color applying 528 deleting 529 background image deleting 531 inserting 530 border color 531 invisible 532 size 533 columns adding 521 deleting 521 spanning 543 specifying 520 creating 510 deleting 511 inserting within a table 512 locking in position 431 rows adding 521 d
42. entered will be lost when the screen refreshes Edit By clicking the Edit link you can edit the Task Type chosen in the Task Type drop down box See Also Editing a Task Type on page 391 Note If you edit a Task Type while adding a task the task information Task Title Assigned To Language etc entered will be lost when the screen refreshes State Choose a status for the task Your choices are Not Started In Progress Completed Waiting on Someone else Deferred If the task is not linked to content you can assign it to any state However if you later link the task to content via the Content link above the state switches to Not Started The state appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by state Field Description Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 386 Start Date Using the calendar button choose a start date for the task The start date appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by start date Technical note If you see a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windows Control Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make sure the settings apply to the default user Due Date Using the calendar button choose the date by which the task needs to be com
43. it is not added to the CMS database nor can it be retrieved for future use Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item To add a submenu as a menu item via content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 325 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 326 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page on page 327 2 Click the radio button next to Submenu 3 The Add Menu screen is displayed 4 Complete the fields using Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 321 as a reference 5 Click the Save button Adding an Item to a Submenu 1 From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus 2 Select the menu 3 Find the submenu to which you want to add items Submenus have a folder icon next to them URL Link The URL link for the external hyperlink For example www google com Field Description Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 332 4 Click the Add Item icon next to the submenu 5 The Add Menu screen opens displaying items you can add 6 Refer to the table below for selecting a menu item and follow the steps to add it Assign this type of content to the menu For details see Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 328 Any library asset images files Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu
44. ll choose Approve Second Approver After the content is approved the next approver in the approval chain receives an email saying that the content is ready for approval Button Result Approve Send content to next approver in approval chain Decline 1 Send email to creator notifying him her that content was declined 2 Remove content from approval chain Edit Invokes the editor From here the approver can change the content Approving Declining Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 102 EditorInChief logs in to Ektron CMS400 NET and accesses his Workarea The Workarea has an Approval folder with the content awaiting his approval EditorInChief navigates through the Approval folder until he finds the content Red Sox win World Series From this window EditorInChief can view information about the content including title go live date user who created it etc He then clicks the content he wants to approve This window is similar to the previous approver s but includes a Publish button at the top of the screen The EditorInChief has a publish button instead of a submit button because he is the last Approving Declining Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 103 approver in the approval chain When he approves the content it is published to the Web site Like the Sports editor the EditorInChief has the following options
45. menu 2 Click the Menu Navigation link title on the Web page 3 A DHTML menu is displayed along with all menu items on the menu 4 Click Edit Menu 5 The Edit Menu Item screen appears 6 See Icons on the View Menus Screen on page 336 Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 339 Editing Types of Menu Items This section explains how to edit the following types of menu items content on your Web site library asset link to an external Web site submenu See Also Working with Menus on page 316 Editing a Content Menu Item To edit a content menu item via its content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Navigate to the menu you want to edit by referencing Viewing a Menu on page 344 2 The View Menu screen displays the menu items 3 Click the edit icon next to the content you want to edit 4 The Edit Menu Item screen opens Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 340 5 Using the table below as a reference make changes to the content menu item Fields on the Edit Menu Item Screen Field Description Title The name that was given to the menu item by the creator Edit if needed Description Add a more detailed description for the content menu item that is being edited Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Vers
46. on page 520 eWebEditPro XML also lets you perform actions on individual cells within a table You can perform the following actions on individual table cells Specifying the Width of a Cell on page 535 Inserting a Cell on page 536 Deleting a Cell on page 537 Setting a Cell s Border Color on page 538 Specifying a Cell s Background Color on page 539 Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 541 Spanning Rows or Columns on page 543 Aligning Text Within a Cell on page 545 Splitting a Cell on page 548 Merging Two Cells on page 549 Word Wrap on page 550 Setting Cell Padding and Spacing on page 551 NOTE HTML does not allow you to adjust the width of a cell s border You can also select several cells or a row of cells and change them as described above However you cannot select and change a column of cells Specifying the Width of a Cell As described in Specifying Table Width on page 522 there are several ways to set the width of a table Within a table you can also specify the width of an individual cell Working with Table Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 536 When you set a cell width there is no guarantee that the cell will occupy that width when displayed in a browser This is because the cell is part of a column
47. page 406 Properties View and modify settings XML Configuration The Managing XML chapter of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual Content Searchable Check this box if the content should be found when someone searches your Web site Return Go back to previous menu View language View If you can view content in more than one language select a language from the drop down list Add select language Add select language Lets you copy current content into a new item and translate it to selected language Translating Content to Another Language on page 51 Button or Tab Name Description For more information see Field Description Content Title The title assigned to the content Content ID The ID number assigned to the content The ID number is used to retrieve content from a database Content language The content s language Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 44 Expanding the Content Area It is possible to expand the content area of the screen vertically This gives you more space to work on content You can expand the Status The current status of the content See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 592 Last User to Edit The last user to edit this content Last Edit Date When the content was last edited Start Date When the content will go live on the Web site End Date W
48. s address looks like this http www ektron com single cfm doc_id 35 Benefits2 4 Click the address bar The address is selected Press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt to copy the address into the Windows clipboard 5 Go to eWebEditPro XML 6 Select the text or image from which you want to jump to the bookmark 7 Click the Hyperlink button The hyperlink dialog box appears 8 Move the cursor to the Link field 9 Press lt Ctrl gt lt V gt to paste the address you copied in Step 4 into the Link field 10 Click OK Editing a Hyperlink If you need to change a hyperlink s destination Web page or target frame follow these steps Using Hyperlinks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 562 1 Click the Hyperlink button The hyperlink dialog box appears 2 Edit the Link or Target Frame field as needed 3 Press OK Removing a Hyperlink If you want to remove the hyperlink from text or an image select the text or image and press the Remove Hyperlink button Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink If you enter a URL or an email address into eWebEditPro XML it automatically becomes a hyperlink To prevent this enter an extra space in the URL or address For example instead of entering sales ektron com enter sales lt blank gt ektron com Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 563 Working with HTML eWebEditPro XML
49. summary metadata etc A toolbar at the top of the screen lists tasks you can perform on the content Button Name Result of Clicking Publish Accept changes to the content and publish it to the site Note If there is another approver in the approval chain for the content this is replaced by a SUBMIT button If you click Publish but the content item has an incomplete task assigned to another user the content cannot be published Instead the following error message appears The user to whom the task is assigned must complete it before you can publish the content Approving Declining Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 97 Approve Decline Several Content Items To approve several submitted content items without reviewing them follow these steps 1 Select the submitted content you want to approve as described in Approve Decline One Content Item on page 95 2 Click the Approve All button 3 The following message appears 4 To continue click OK Decline Reject changes and keep current version of content live on the Web site Edit Check out content and change it if desired View Published Staged Toggle between the currently published version and submitted version of content This can help you compare versions See Also Staged Content on page 599 View Diff View differences between the version awaiting approval and the currently publish
50. 0 Revision 1 138 4 Click Done 5 If desired select an End Date using the same procedure NOTE If you do not select an end date the report uses today for the end date 6 To include all content proceed to the next step To include only content in a selected folder and possibly its subfolders click Content Folder then select any folder See Also Selecting Content by Folder on page 121 7 Choose whether you want the report to display in a horizontal or vertical format A horizontal format is shown in the screen sample above A vertical format is below Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 139 8 If you want to include all subfolders under the selected folder click Include Subfolders 9 Click Get Result The Display of Information on the Report The Site Activity Update Report displays the following information for the content that satisfies the selection criteria Folder Name the top level folder appears first in blue followed by any subfolders following the top level folders are the first level subfolders in alphabetical order Their subfolders do not appear but their content affects the totals for each subfolder Updated Count number of content items in each folder that have been created or updated within the selected date range For every folder other than the top level folder which appears in blue the count includes
51. 0 Revision 1 48 Buttons on the Add Content Screen Tabs on the Add Content Screen Button Name Description Submit Submit the content into the approval chain This action also returns the changed content to the database and exits the editor See Also Approving Declining Content on page 94 Publish Publish the content to the Web site Note Only the last approver in the approval chain sees this button See Also Approving Declining Content on page 94 This action also returns the changed content to the database and exits the editor Check In Save and check in the document This action returns the changed content to the database and exits the editor It does not submit the content into the approval chain Rather it allows you and other users to continue changing it Save Save the content without leaving the editor It is a good idea to save your work frequently Cancel Close the editor without saving changes Tab Name Description Content Add edit content Insert content For more information about using Ektron CMS400 NET s editor see Introduction to eWebEditPro XML on page 417 Summary Edit Summary Enter or edit the summary for the content See Also Adding a Content Summary on page 82 Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 49 Editing Content Ektron CMS400 NET content can be in any of several statuses as desc
52. 4 The content is in the approval chain The next user in the chain receives an email saying the content is ready for approval Approving Declining Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 99 NOTE Emails are only sent if your Administrator enables them The content contributor Sports Writer has completed his role in the approval chain but continues to receive emails notifying him of changes in the content s status First Approver After Sports Writer submits the content the first user in the approval chain Sports Editor receives an email stating content needs his approval He can change and approve the content or decline it Approving Declining Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 100 Sports Editor logs into Ektron CMS400 NET navigates to his desktop where he sees a link Content Awaiting Approval He clicks the link and sees all content awaiting his approval The approvals folder window displays information such as title who submitted it go live date etc The Sports editor clicks the submitted content The View Content Awaiting Approvals window appears listing all information necessary to decide whether to approve or decline the content Approving Declining Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 101 At the approval window the Sports Editor has several options For demonstration purposes we
53. 66 partners content Monday employee green All Words All Words works like an and function The search returns only content that has the words partners and content and Monday and employee and green The words can be in any order within the file Any Word Any Word is almost the opposite of All of the Words It works like an or function When you select this option the search returns all files that have at least one of the words entered in the search text field In other words it returns files with the word partners or content or Monday or employee or green Exact Phrase Exact Phrase returns content blocks that have all five words in the order specified in the search text field A better example would be to search for a phrase such as Content Management Solution The search yields only content blocks with that exact phrase Contains Match Partial Words Although you cannot search for wild cards the Match Partial Words option does almost the same For example enter at into the search text field then select Match Partial Words The search returns all content with the letters at finding words such as At Bat Chatter Atoll ATM etc Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 67 Search Data The next section of the search screen lets you choose one or more customized search criteria As you can see the top g
54. 7 Click Apply then OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 261 Using the Document Management Functionality IMPORTANT This chapter references CMS400 NET CMS400 NET is a separate product that requires its own license Please contact Ektron Sales for details sales ektron com WARNING The functionality described in this section is not supported when using an Apple Macintosh for editing content The Document Management Functionality DM lets you import Microsoft Office files Open Office files as well as most other kinds of files into Ektron CMS400 NET Non Office files are known as managed files Collectively these files are known as documents After being saved in Ektron CMS400 NET documents can be updated and tracked like HTML and XML content If you re familiar with how that content is handled most of what you know also applies to documents For example documents can be stored in folders with other content or in separate folders that you create just for them are assigned content ID numbers capture summary metadata comment task and schedule information inherit permissions and approvals from their folder properties progress through a workflow check out check in publish provide a history and let you restore an earlier version can be searched including some Office document properties can have foreign language editions
55. Begin the line on which the cursor rests or all selected lines with a bullet Indent Increase or decrease the current line s distance from the left margin Left Center and Right Justify Align paragraph so that it is arranged evenly on the left side uneven on the right in the center of each line evenly on the right side uneven on the left evenly on right and left side Button Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Function For more information see Toolbar Buttons Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 431 Position Objects Options These buttons let you absolutely position elements pictures tables etc anywhere on a page WARNING Some older browsers for example Netscape 4 do not display absolutely positioned elements Absolute position uses the style attribute If you use this feature the content is not compatible with all browsers Text Direction Options The text direction menu options allow bi directional editing of text which is useful for Arabic Farsi and Hebrew The client computer must also support the language About eWebEditPro XML Display a dialog box that shows your version of eWebEditPro XML and your license keys Button Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Function For more information see Button Function Position Lets you move selected table or image anywhere on the screen Lock
56. CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 136 After selecting a number of days click the view icon to see all content that will expire within that time frame Site Update Activity Report The Site Activity Report provides a snapshot of the freshness of the content on your Web site Specifically it lists how many content items were created or updated within a date range you select broken down by folder how many content items were not created or updated during that time the percentage of stale content percentage of content items that were not created or updated during that time Select a number from the dropdown list below the Days field Option Illustration Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 137 A sample report appears below Selecting Information to Appear on the Report To choose which content items will appear on the report follow these steps 1 By default only content in the default language will appear on the report To change the language use the language pull down near the top of the screen 2 Choose a Start Date by clicking the calendar icon 3 A calendar appears You can move to another month or year by clicking it When you get to the desired month click inside the day The selected date turns red see below Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2
57. Edit Calendar Event screen appears 4 Click the Delete button 5 A confirmation message appears 6 Click OK Deleting a Recurring Calendar Event You can delete a single event in a recurring series or all events in the series Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 380 Deleting a Single Recurring Event 1 Access the View Calendar Events screen for the date that contains the event you want to delete as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 369 2 Click the event you want to delete 3 The Edit Calendar Event screen appears 4 Click the Delete Content button 5 A confirmation message appears 6 Click OK Deleting All Events in a Recurring Series 1 Access the View Calendar Events screen for any date that contains an events in the series that you want to delete as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 369 2 Click the event in the series that you want to delete 3 The Edit Calendar Event screen appears 4 Click the Delete This and Associated Recurring Events button 5 A confirmation message appears 6 Click OK Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 381 Managing Tasks A task is a request from one user to another to perform an action within Ektron CMS400 NET Examples of a tasks include updating content publishing c
58. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 64 IMPORTANT The search only considers content whose Content Searchable box is checked The Content Searchable box appears on the View Properties screen for the content Also the status of the content must be Approved Specifying the Search Word or Phrase In the text field enter one or more words that you want to find within the selected file types The search uses these words to find and return content Entering one or more words here is optional That is you can use fields on the lower portion of the screen to find content without knowing any words contained in the assets For example you can find every HTML content block that was modified by a certain user within the last 30 days If you check off HTML and Form content you can enter no search criteria and get a list of all HTML and Form content blocks on your site IMPORTANT The asset search requires at least one criterion As examples you could enter text into the Search Text field some characters contained in the Title or a minimum Document Size of 1000 kilobytes See Also The Noise Files on page 64 Specifying Match Criteria on page 65 Search Data on page 67 Tips on Responding to Search Criteria Fields on page 69 The Noise Files If you are searching for assets Windows has a noise file that screens from the search every single letter of the alph
59. NET sample site follow these steps 1 In your Web browser navigate to the URL of your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Your system administrator provides this Logging In and Out Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 11 2 Click the Login button on the screen 3 The Login dialog box appears 4 Enter your username and password If you are using one of Ektron s sample sites you can use any of three standard users that demonstrate Ektron s flexible user permissions model The table below lists the username and password needed to log in as each user type as well as the permissions assigned to each user 5 Click the Login button 6 The Web page appears User Type Username Password Permissions Administrator admin admin All Standard user jedit jedit Basic for example add edit content manage library files etc Membership user jmember jmember Read only permission to private content Logging In and Out Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 12 You can navigate around your Web site as you could before signing in But now the content is surrounded by a colored box when you move the cursor over it illustrated below Site Preview While logged into Ektron CMS400 NET you can preview the Web site as it would appear to visitors or view it in regular view Button Appearance Status Description Preview Mode Content appears
60. NOTE Folder information appears at the bottom of the screen only if the folder has subfolders or content under it Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 371 5 Respond to the fields using the following table as a reference Field Description Event Title Enter a title for the event Note If you enter a Quicklink in the Hyperlink field the Quicklink s content title replaces this title You can then edit the new title if desired Event Location If desired enter a location for the event for example Conference Room 1 or Cafeteria One Time Recurring If you want to enter a one time only event continue reading If you want to add a recurring event see Adding a Recurring Event on page 373 Date Click the calendar icon to display a calendar From it select a start date Technical note If you see a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windows Control Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make sure the settings apply to the default user Start Time Click the clock icon to display a clock From it select a start time End Time Click the clock icon to display a clock From it select an ending time for the event Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 372
61. PowerPoint As displayed on the read only Statistics Slides field on PowerPoint s File Properties window s Statistics tab Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 70 Use Before to select all dates prior to a specified date Use After to select all dates later than a specified date Use Between to select dates by specifying a beginning and end date All dates in between are considered If the search field is numeric the dropdown list lets you choose Less Than More Than Equal To or Between Result Display Options At the top of the search screen a pull down list lets you choose the how to display the search results Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 71 View option Description Example Graphical If the item is content or a form display a thumbnail of it If the item is an asset display a generic icon that indicates asset type In both cases to the right are the item s title summary last edited user date and time You can click the title to display the item inside the View Contents screen From there you can perform all available functions on the item Note Graphical search results require the Internet Explorer browser version 6 or greater Sample HTML content Sample Microsoft Word document Text Display item s title in the l
62. Section 508 Compliance Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 575 The following explains how to respond to these fields Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog Field Description Abbreviation Sets or retrieves abbreviated text for the content in the tag Can be used to render non visual media such as speech or Braille For more information see http msdn microsoft com library default asp url workshop author dhtml reference properties abbr asp Section 508 Compliance Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 576 Categories Sets or retrieves a comma delimited list of conceptual categories associated with that tag Can be used to render non visual media such as speech or Braille For more information see http msdn microsoft com workshop author dhtml reference properties axis asp Field Description Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 577 Inserting Comments within Content While editing Ektron CMS400 NET content you can insert comments to the content Comments might be an author s note to himself or other authors about the content For example you could insert a comment explaining why you are using a certain style class Comments are only visible during editing they do not appear when the content is published on your Web site Inserting Comments within Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5
63. The field prompts the user completing the form to enter his email address Label the field something like Enter your email address TIP If the field allows more than one address add on screen instructions to separate each address with a semicolon Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 197 2 Go to the Edit Form screen gt Mail Properties section 3 Move to the field labeled From 4 At the dropdown list following OR to addresses in field select the field you created in Step 1 Now when a user completes the form the value he enters in the field created in Step 1 is used for the email s From address Retrieving Form Data Into the Subject and Preamble Fields You can retrieve data from a submitted form directly to the form s Subject and Preamble fields The subject is a standard mail field and the preamble is text that appears at the beginning of the email For example the form may provide a list of your products While the user is completing the form he selects a product that he is interested in The product then becomes the subject line of the email Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 198 NOTE Since a Textarea field can span multiple lines it can only be used with the preamble However a plain text field can be used with both the subject and preamble To retrieve data dynamically from
64. User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 376 2 Place the cursor on the event you want to view 3 Click the View Events button 4 The View Events screen appears listing all calendar events for that date If an event is part of a series of recurring events the following icon appears next to it From this screen you can perform the following functions Add a new event See Also Adding a Calendar Event on page 369 View edit and delete an existing event Editing Calendar Events The section explains how to edit a single event or a recurring series of events Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 377 NOTE You can only edit a calendar event if you have edit permission for the folder to which the calendar is assigned See Also Adding a Calendar Event on page 369 Editing a Single Event After a calendar event is added to a calendar you may edit it to change the title location times etc To edit a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar Events screen for the date that contains the event you want to edit as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 369 2 Click the event you want to edit 3 The Edit Calendar Event screen appears Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 378 4 Update the fields using the table described in Addi
65. Validation on page 161 Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 157 The Form Toolbar Options Creating form content is similar to creating a standard content item See Adding HTML Content on page 47 The big difference is a special toolbar illustrated below to make it easier to insert form elements All toolbar options except the Select Button pull down also appear on a vertical toolbar to the left of the editor You can use whichever toolbar you prefer all options are the same Adding a Field to the Screen Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 158 The major difference between the toolbars is how you add a field to the screen If you are using the horizontal toolbar place the cursor where you want field and click the toolbar button When using the vertical toolbar drag a button to the desired screen location Note that a context sensitive menu available by right clicking the mouse is also available to perform these actions You can right click the mouse then select Insert Field to display a context sensitive menu of all commands Inserting Form Fields The final screen of the Forms setup lets you arrange the screen so that it collects exactly the information you want To create the screen you insert fields that prompt a site visitor to enter Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manu
66. Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 445 Menu Option Lets you For more information see Menus View all toolbar menus Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse on page 568 Cut Remove selected text and graphics Place that data into temporary memory If you later cut or copy more information into memory the information in memory is lost Copy Copy selected text and graphics into temporary memory Leave selected data where it is If you later cut or copy more information into memory the original information is lost Copying from Other Applications on page 448 Paste Insert the most recently cut or copied text and graphics at the current cursor location Paste Text Paste the contents of the clipboard as plain text That is all HTML tags including images are not pasted This button is helpful when you want to eliminate the HTML formatting of the text being copied Select All Select all information on your page After you select it you can cut it copy it etc Clean Source Remove unnecessary HTML tags Cleaning Source Code on page 565 Hyperlink Create a link to another Web page or a spot within the current page Using Hyperlinks on page 557 Edit Source Edit your page s HTML source Editing a Section of a Page on page 564 Insert Source Insert HTML source onto the page at the cursor location Inserting Source on page 564 The Context Sensitive Menu Ekt
67. View Task View task information Viewing a Task on page 395 Updating Your User Profile Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 407 Updating Your User Profile When a new user is added to an Ektron CMS400 NET Web site the administrator sets up a personal profile for him It contains information such as password and email address You can update some personal profile information when needed This section explains how to modify your personal profile Viewing Your Profile Before changing your personal profile you must view it To do so follow these steps 1 Access your Smart Desktop See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 21 2 From the lower left frame click Settings 3 From the top left frame click User Profile 4 Your user profile appears Updating Your User Profile Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 408 5 Click the Edit button in the top left corner 6 The Edit User Information screen appears 7 The following table explains fields you can edit Updating Your User Profile Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 409 Field Description Password If desired enter a new password into this field If you change your password you do not need to log out then log back in However the next time you log in you must use the new password Confirm Pwd Confirm your new password
68. Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 193 for information about toggling this option on and off Advantages of a Mailto Form By creating a mailto form any email generation is done on the server side not on the client This means that site visitors can submit email whether or not the client has email software Storing Form Data in a Database By storing form data in the Ektron CMS400 NET database you can keep information submitted by site visitors and view reports on that information You can also export the form data to a spreadsheet Deleting a Form You can easily delete forms that are no longer needed NOTE Deleting a form also deletes its associated content and information To delete a form follow these steps 1 Access the View Form screen for the form you want to delete 2 Click the Delete Form button 3 A confirmation message is displayed 4 Click OK View Form Toolbar Several toolbar buttons and tabs help you work with forms To learn about toolbar buttons available when creating or editing a form see Inserting Form Fields on page 158 Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 201 Button or Tab Name Description More Information Edit Content Edit the form s content which contains the form fields Editing a Form s Content on page 199 View Staged Published Content Click View Staged button to v
69. a form field into the email s subject line or preamble follow these steps 1 Add a form field that collects the information you want to insert into the email s subject line or preamble See Also Inserting Form Fields on page 158 2 Go to the Edit Form screen gt Mail Properties section See Also Editing a Form on page 198 3 Move to the field labeled Subject or Preamble 4 At the dropdown list following OR use text in field select the field you created in Step 1 Editing a Form After you create a form it can easily be edited if information needs to be changed You can update the following information by following the procedure below the form fields post back message metadata schedule comments Web Alerts However to edit a form s Title Description form data or task values use the Edit Properties screen To edit a form follow these steps 1 Access the View Form screen for the form you want to edit as described in Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 193 2 Click the Edit Form button Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 199 3 The Edit Form screen is displayed The screen is the same as the Add New Form screen For documentation of individual fields see Creating a New Form on page 147 4 Make the necessary changes to the form 5 Click the Save
70. and any network folder available to your computer into the editor NOTE You can only select files in the To Select a Local File field if your computer has permission to upload files to the server To insert a picture from your computer follow these steps 1 Click the Browse button 2 Navigate to the file that you want to insert and press Open to insert it Your Webmaster can set a maximum size in kilobytes for images If you select an image that exceeds the maximum an error message appears and you cannot insert it Your Webmaster can also restrict the type of image file you can insert For example if your Webmaster does not authorize you to insert bitmap bmp files and you try to do so an error message lists valid file extensions and you cannot insert the image Inserting Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 467 3 Click in the Enter a description for the file field Enter a title to describe the file 4 After you insert the picture the title appears in the dialog box s top left corner to identify the picture to you and all users connected to the same Web server NOTE The title is also the alt text for the image The alt text appears in place of the image on the Web page if the image itself cannot display for any reason 5 Information about the picture s file size width and height appears in the upper right corner of the dialog box 6 If you want to view
71. as C Documents and Settings your user name Local Settings Temp test png Any other file type is saved in your temporary directory without changing the file extension unless you use the Save As option For example you save test jpg as test png Assigning a Name to a New Image If you create an image in WebImageFX and then exit WebImageFX and return to eWebEditPro XML the system assigns the image a random name such as WIF50A jpg If you want to assign a different name and or folder to the image use the Save as command See Also Save As on page 502 Toolbar Buttons and Menu Commands The following tables list each toolbar button and menu command They are followed by a more detailed description of each function Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 480 File Menu Options Edit Menu Options Toolbar Button Command Brief Description For more information see Create New Creates a new image Create New on page 489 Open Selects an image to edit Open on page 495 Save Saves changes to an image Save on page 501 Save As Saves the current image under a different name or format Save As on page 502 Twain Acquire Performs a single page scan Before scanning you must select a source using the Twain Source command Twain Acquire on page 506 Twain Source Allows the user to select a source for acquiring an image
72. at the top of the page perform any action available Column Description Title Title of content ID ID number assigned to content by Ektron CMS400 NET Last Editor Last user to edit the content End Date Date and time the content expired Path Folder location of content in Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 135 Content to Expire Report The Content to Expire report lists all content whose end date will occur between today and a number of days that you specify For example if today is January 1 and you select 10 days the report lists all content whose end date is January 1 through January 10 After viewing the report you can click any content and proceed to the View Content screen for it From there you can edit information about it including its end date if desired Each item on the list contains the following information Selecting the Report s Date Range To select the report s date range you have two options Column Description Title Title of content ID ID number assigned to content by Ektron CMS400 NET Last Editor Last user to edit the content End Date Date and time the content expired Path Folder location of content in Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Option Illustration Enter a number in the Days field Then click the View Reports button Content Workflow Reports Ektron
73. button 35 toolbar button 35 WebImageFX command 490 delete cell toolbar button 433 delete column toolbar button 433 delete row toolbar button 433 deleting cell 537 folders 74 table 511 Detect All field eWebDiff 108 difference Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 iii content view toolbar button 5 dimensions WebImageFX command 490 display borders toolbar button 434 Do not apply XSLT button 35 document creating document management feature 283 importing into DMS 270 importing several into AMS 272 279 Office creating document man agement feature 266 document management feature adding documents to collections 293 adding documents to menus 293 approving file 293 checking in document 269 creating managed file 283 creating Office document 266 deleting document 293 document types 262 drag and drop files 288 exit without saving changes 270 file types 262 importing document 270 importing several documents 272 279 installing on client 17 introduction 261 managed files 264 282 Office document properties editing 268 Office document editing 275 Office documents 263 overview 261 reports 293 reports of document by status 293 saving recent changes 270 saving to local computer 270 security 264 submitting for publication 270 viewing documents in CMS 292 work offline 270 275 workflow 291 documentation online accessing 412 drag and drop files documen
74. can select a folder and only view the content in that folder that satisfies the other report criteria For example the Checked in Content Report can show only content whose status is checked in and which resides in the Contacts folder Only content in the selected folder appears The report does not include content from subfolders of the selected folder To select content by a folder follow these steps 1 From the Smart Desktop select a report 2 Click the Select a Folder button Select the type of the content you want to see on the report Toolbar Button Description For more information see Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 122 3 The top level folders appear 4 If the folder you want is on the list click the corresponding checkbox If the folder you want is a subfolder click the parent folder s name A new screen appears showing the selected folder s subfolders Click the corresponding checkbox 5 Click the Save button to finalize your folder selection 6 The screen displays all content items in the selected folder that satisfy all report criteria Selecting Content by Type After viewing any report you can select a content type and only view the content of that type that satisfies the other report criteria For example the Checked in Content Report can show only Office documents To select a content type follow these s
75. change 4 Change any of the field values For documentation of the fields see Complete the screen using the following table on page 303 Deleting a Collection When you no longer want a collection you can delete it To delete a collection follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 297 Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 312 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 299 3 Click the Delete button 4 A confirmation message appears 5 Click OK to proceed Working with Collections in a Multi Language System In a multi language Ektron CMS400 NET system you can create a language specific edition of each collection For example prior to the 4 7 Release the RC International sample site s products page had a collection in the default application language English unless you change it From 4 7 on you can create an edition of a collection in every enabled language When a visitor to your site selects a language then navigates to a page with a collection Ektron CMS400 NET displays the collection in the selected language if available If not Ektron CMS400 NET displays nothing NOTE Note the contrast between the collections and content
76. collection s language and cannot be changed 9 Create the content Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 309 NOTE Refer to Adding Content on page 45 for additional information about creating new content 10 Click a workflow option in the Add Content screen 11 The Add Content screen closes and the new content link appears in the list of links available to the collection 12 Check off the content you created and other content 13 Click the Add button to add the content to the collection Editing Content in a Collection After a collection is created you can add or remove links to and from it Adding Content to the Collection For information about adding content links to a collection see Assigning Content to the Collection on page 305 Removing Content from the Collection To remove a content link from a collection follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 297 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 299 3 Click the Remove button 4 The Delete Items from Collection screen appears Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 310 5 Click boxes next to links
77. completed by the person submitting the form Form title Form description Date form was submitted by site visitor For example your postback message may be Thank you Full Name for completing the Form Title When the postback message appears it looks like this Thank you Jay Kohler for completing the breakroom survey Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 151 Redirect to an Action Page and Forwarding Form Data The following section of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual explains how your administrator sets up the action page Working with HTML Forms gt Redirecting Submitted Form Data After your administrator follows that procedure he identifies a folder and hyperlink that you use to select an action page WARNING You must have the folder and hyperlink name from your administrator to complete this procedure To redirect submitted form data to an action page follow these steps 1 Go to the page on which you determine the form s response If this is a new form it is page 4 of the Forms Wizard To modify an existing form select the form s folder then the form Next select Edit and click the Post Back Message tab 2 Select Redirect to an action page and forward form data 3 Click the icon next to File or page 4 The Select dialog appears Click the Select button 5 The library appears In the le
78. content See Adding a Library File to Content on page 224 You can also insert an item into the library while adding it to content See Adding a File to the Library and Inserting it into Content on page 226 If you insert an image file it appears within the content If you add any other type of file the file name appears as a hyperlink within the content When a site visitor viewing that page clicks the hyperlink the inserted file is launched Adding a Library File to Content Adding a Library File to Content 1 Invoke the editor by adding or editing content in Ektron CMS400 NET Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 225 2 Place the cursor within the content where you want the library file to appear 3 Click the library button 4 The library opens 5 Navigate to the folder that contains the file you want to insert 6 From the file types dropdown list select the kind of file you want to insert 7 All library files of that type in the selected folder appear on the screen Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 226 8 Click the file you want to insert NOTE You can preview the file by clicking the preview button 9 Click the insert button to insert the file 10 A hyperlink to the file appears in your content You can click the link to open the file Adding a File to t
79. cursor on the annotation and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 486 Choose Font Standard Toolbar Button Description Lets you choose the color of annotation text before you insert it To change an annotation s color after inserting it place the cursor on the annotation and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 487 Color Depth Standard Toolbar Button Description Changes an image s color depth See Also Specifying Color Depth on page 508 Dialog Box Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 488 Contrast Standard Toolbar Button Description Increases or decreases an image s contrast that is the difference between light and dark areas of an image You can select a contrast level from 10 through 10 If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area Dialog Box Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 489 Copy Standard Toolbar Button Description Copies a selected area of an image After you copy an image you can paste it using the paste command See Also Paste as New Image on page 497 To select an area of an image
80. describes the following aspects of managing menus Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 317 what they are how they can be used how to the add edit view and delete a them What s In This Chapter The following topics explain Menus The Structure of Menus and Menu Items on page 317 Access to the Menus Feature on page 318 Adding a New Menu on page 319 Adding a Menu Item on page 325 Editing a Menu on page 333 Editing a Menu Item on page 335 Viewing a Menu on page 344 Reordering Menu Items on page 348 Deleting a Menu on page 349 Deleting a Menu Item on page 351 Working with Menus in a Multi Language System on page 352 The Structure of Menus and Menu Items Menus have the following structure menu top level structure that is a placeholder for menu items and submenus It is assigned to a content folder If a menu item links to content it must reside in the assigned folder or one of its subfolders A menu also identifies the page template used to display menu options that are content menu item the individual options on a menu can be any of the following content library asset Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 318 external hyperlink li
81. different folder or under a different name or file type use the Save As command Save As Standard Toolbar Button Description Save the current image under a different name or format For example you might save mypicture gif as mypicture jpg Your system administrator determines which file formats are available Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 503 Dialog Box See Save on page 501 Select Standard Toolbar Button Description Selects an area of an image You can then execute other commands on the selected area such as blur sharpen cut and delete NOTE Once you press the Select command it remains selected and continues to be active until you press it a second time Sharpen Standard Toolbar Button Description Sharpens edges within an image You can select a level of sharpness from 1 through 5 Sharpening brings an image into better focus and increases the detail If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area Dialog Box Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 504 Text Standard Toolbar Button Description Places text on an image You can also change the text s size font color and attributes bold italic etc To use the Text command follow these steps 1 Click the Text button 2 Move the cursor to where you want to place the text 3
82. enter a partial word For example entering Part yields the following results Multi Hospital Nurse Executive Participation Ektron Partners and Customers You can also enter more than one word or phrase as long as they are in the correct sequence Comments The content or form s comments which can be inserted via the Comment tab Date Created The file s creation date You can enter a single date or a range of dates The search returns all items with that creation date that satisfy all other criteria Date Modified The late date when the file was modified You can enter a single date or a range of dates The search returns all items with that edit date that satisfy all other criteria Last Editor s Last Name The last name surname of the user who most recently changed the content or form This is taken from the Last Name field on the User Information screen The search returns all items last edited by that user that satisfy all other criteria Status The content status See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 592 Note Although you can search for content by any status the search results display only the most recently published version If a version has never been approved nothing appears Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 62 Custom Fields Custom fields are defined by your system administrator and applied to content
83. follow these steps The procedure below is quicker if you are deleting several or all items at once 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 345 2 Click the menu you want to delete 3 The View Menu screen for that menu is displayed 4 Click the Remove button 5 The Delete Menu Item screen opens 6 Click the check box next to the menu item you want to delete You can click Select All to choose all menu items Click Clear All to unselect all menu items 7 Click the Delete button Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 352 Removing a Menu Item via Menus Module You can delete any menu item by clicking the accompanying Delete icon on the View menu screen Alternatively you can follow these steps The procedure below is quicker if you are deleting several or all items at once 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 347 2 Click the Remove button 3 The Delete Menu Item screen opens 4 Click the checkbox next to the menu item you want to delete You can click Select All to choose all menu items delete Click Clear All to unselect all menu items 5 Click the Delete button Working with Menus in a Multi Language System NOTE For background information about supporting multiple languages on your Web site s
84. for NET 2 0 Revision 1 578 Other users can add comments to your comments This feature is know as Content Collaboration Similar to other word processing programs comments can be added updated and tracked to audit changes being made This section explains the content collaboration feature WARNING Do not confuse these comments which are inserted within the content with history comments which are inserted outside the content and used to indicate what changed during an editing session Adding Comments to Content To add a comment to content follow these steps 1 Create new content or edit existing content See Also Adding Content on page 45 2 In the editor place the cursor where you want to insert the comment 3 On the editor toolbar click the Insert Comment button 4 The Ektron CMS Comment window opens 5 Insert a comment Use the toolbar to format the text if desired 6 Click the Insert button 7 The comment is saved 8 Click the Close button 9 The comment window closes and a comment icon is placed where the comment was added to the content Inserting Comments within Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 579 Each comment appears in the table at the top of the window From this window you can add another comment and update an existing one See the next section for more details Viewing a Comment After a comment is inse
85. for Deletion Content 598 Pending Start Date Content 598 Staged Content 599 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 1 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Using Ektron CMS400 NET to manage Web content is easy once you know the basics of setting up and maintaining your site This documentation explains how to maintain an Ektron CMS400 NET site from a user s point of view By reading this documentation you will gain an understanding of how Ektron CMS400 NET works This section introduces basic concepts that you should understand when beginning to work with Ektron CMS400 NET through the following subtopics What is a Content Block on page 1 Workflow in Ektron CMS400 NET on page 7 Editing Content on page 7 The Lifecycle of Content on page 8 What is a Content Block Any Web site consists of several pages Each page is made up of one or more blocks of content For example the home page of the sample Web site that is installed with Ektron CMS400 NET is below Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 2 After you sign in notice that as you move the cursor colored borders appears around one
86. history accessing from Web page 50 112 accessing via Workarea 50 112 marked for deletion definition 598 metadata see searchable proper ties pending start date 598 previous version viewing 111 publish see publish reports checked in content 129 checked out content 130 content pending start date 132 content to expire 135 expired content 134 new content 130 refresh reminder 133 submitted content 131 restoring previous version 111 scheduling 75 searching for within site 55 start date setting 75 statuses 592 approved 592 submitted definition 596 summary see summary to expire report 135 workflow reports see reports content block see also content add button 34 adding 45 creating 45 definition 1 deleting 52 several at once 35 editing 49 overview 7 finding 7 lifecycle 8 properties 43 translating 51 viewing 40 contrast WebImageFX command 488 copy information from other applications 448 toolbar and menu option 426 WebImageFX command 489 copyright character inserting 428 create new WebImageFX command 489 creating document document manage ment feature 283 Office document document man agement feature 266 crop WebImageFX command 489 customizing toolbar 436 cut toolbar and menu option 425 D decline content from approval report 127 from publishing 97 one content block 95 several content blocks 97 delete button floating toolbar 5 content toolbar button 35 folder toolbar
87. if a collection is not available in the selected language nothing appears But if content is not available in the selected language content in the default language appears When creating a collection for a foreign language decide if you want to create a foreign edition of an existing collection or a new collection in a foreign language For example if you want to provide several versions of a single page that change depending on the language selected by the user see Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Exists on page 313 On the other hand if you are creating a collection to appear only on a foreign language page and no other edition of the collection will appear on your site see Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Does Not Exist on page 313 Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 313 You can only add content in the language of a collection So create the content first then create the collection that links to them Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Exists 1 Click the content folder in which your collection exists The folder s contents are displayed 2 Click the View Collections button 3 The View Collections screen is displayed 4 Select the collection that you want to translate 5 From the Add drop down list select the language of the new collecti
88. images are available To insert an image into a cell follow these steps 1 Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse 2 Click Table from the menu 3 Click Cell Properties from the menu 4 Move the cursor to the Background Image field of the Cell Properties dialog box 5 Click the down arrow to the right of Select Image A list of background images appears 6 Click the image of your choice 7 Click OK Note that when you apply a background image to a cell Working with Table Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 542 If the cell is larger than the image the image repeats until it fills the cell If the cell is smaller than the image the top left corner of the image appears in the top left corner of the cell The rest of the image fills as much of the cell as possible Make sure the image does not obscure a user s ability to read the cell text if any exists Deleting a Background Image 1 Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse 2 Click Table from the menu 3 Click Cell Properties from the menu 4 Select the value in the Background Image field and press lt Backspace gt Using the Color Box Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box 1 Click the question mark in the top right corner Working with Table Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1
89. in Editing a File on page 220 The only difference is that you edit an image s title instead of a file title Overwriting Images When an image in the library becomes out of date or if the wrong version of an image was copied you may overwrite that image with a new or correct version Overwriting images minimizes disk space and the number of copied library images NOTE Overwriting images is a permission that your system administrator may or may not assign to you Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 229 To overwrite an image follow the procedure described in Overwriting Files on page 220 The only difference is that you overwrite an image instead of a file NOTE You can only overwrite an image with another image of the same extension that is gif gt gif not jpg gt gif Adding Images to Your Content Once an image is added to the library users can add it to content To add an image to content follow the procedure described in Adding a Library File to Content on page 224 The only difference is that you add an image instead of a file The image is placed into the picture properties dialog box where you can change it before inserting it For information about the picture properties dialog box see Using the First Picture Properties Dialog Box on page 463 Quicklinks and Forms For a definition of the terms quicklinks and forms see Ter
90. in this status For more information see Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 295 Working with Collections A collection provides a list of content that can be placed on a Web page to offer readers links to them In the following illustration the circled content is an example of a collection on a Web page You can also use a collection to display other listings such as job postings press releases and knowledge base articles The following graphic illustrates the use of a collection on the landing page of Ektron s Knowledge Base Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 296 This section explains how to create collections Your system administrator would then modify content to display the collections on your Web site using the ecmCollection function or server control NOTE Your system administrator must assign to you permission to work with collections For details see the Collections chapter of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual This section explains how to find create and manage collections through the following subtopics Finding Collections on page 296 Viewing a Collection on page 299 Creating a Collection on page 301 Editing Content in a Collection on page 309 Reordering Collections List on page 310 Editing Collection Info
91. information see Insert table Introduction to Tables on page 509 Add row Inserts a new row below the last one Add column Inserts a new column to the right or the right column Toolbar Buttons Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 433 Insert row Inserts a new row above the current one Insert column Inserts a new column to the left of the current one Insert new cell Inserts a new cell to the left of the current one Delete row Deletes current row Delete column Deletes current column Delete cells Deleting a Cell on page 537 Merge cells Merging Two Cells on page 549 Split cell Splitting a Cell on page 548 Table properties Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 520 Cell properties Working with Table Cells on page 535 Toolbar button Description For more information see Toolbar Buttons Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 434 Miscellaneous Toolbar Button Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Function For more information see Open File Open local file and copy it into CMS content While you can open any file type Ektron CMS400 NET s editor only works with htm and xml files When you open a file into a content block the new file replaces any content currently in the block Save File Save CMS content as file on your computer or network Since Ektron CMS400 NE
92. information about it fills the right frame The top left frame displays the folder tree for the Smart Desktop folder which has two subfolders Tasks See Managing Tasks on page 381 Content Reports see Content Workflow Reports on page 117 The bottom left frame displays the top level folders in Ektron CMS400 NET Your display may be different depending on whether you are an administrator Content folder see Working with Folders and Content on page 32 Forms folder see Working with HTML Forms on page 144 Library Folder on page 208 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 23 Modules see Working with Collections on page 295 Working with Menus on page 316 Working with Calendars on page 357 and Private Content amp Memberships section of the Managing Users amp User Groups chapter of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual Settings folder which includes Updating Your User Profile on page 407 and Accessing Online Help on page 412 Navigating Within the Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET s top level folders appear in the lower left corner of the Smart Desktop Use them to access all other folders To open any top level folder click it When you do it appears in the frame above Typically you would a click top level folder to see its subfolders then click a
93. insert a date by clicking a calendar Inserting a Calendar Field on page 182 Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 160 After you complete the form you have the following options Button or Tab Description Postback Message See Composing the Postback Message on page 150 Metadata Edit the metadata for the content See Also Adding or Editing Metadata on page 86 Schedule Assign start or end dates or both for when content is published to Web site See Also Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 75 Comment Enter history comment to indicate changes made to content Web Alerts Assign or update Web Alert information for the form See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Web Alert Feature Submit Submit content into approval process Publish Publish content to Web site Note If the content has any active tasks a comments window pops up You can insert comments to describe how approving or declining the content affects the task Note Only the last approver in the approval chain sees this button Check In Save and check in content This button does not submit the content into the approval process but rather lets other users change it Save Save the content without submitting it into the approval process If a user clicks save and then closes the editor other users cannot edit the content Decline
94. items at one time To do so follow these steps 1 Access the content folder that contains the content you want to delete 2 Click the Delete Content button 3 The Delete Contents of Folder screen is displayed 4 Check boxes next to content items you want to delete NOTE Check off the box in the header cell to select all or deselect all 5 Click the Delete Content button 6 A confirmation message is displayed 7 Click OK to continue Checking for Broken Quicklinks The Check Links button locates all content that includes a Quicklink to the displayed content This feature is useful before deleting content because it informs you of every content item that will include a dead link after you delete the selected content You Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 55 should then edit that content and remove or change the obsolete Quicklinks To use the link checker follow these steps 1 Access the View Content page for the content whose links you want to check as described in Viewing Content on page 40 2 Click the Check Links button 3 A page lists each content item that links to the current content Click the title to access the View Content page for the selected content From there you can remove or change the Quicklink Searching the Workarea You can search any folder to easily and quickly loca
95. list and click OK Working with Table Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 547 Setting Vertical Alignment In the Cell Properties dialog box you can specify the vertical alignment of a cell You have four choices top middle bottom along the baseline of the first line of text the term baseline is defined in Aligning the Picture on page 471 This example illustrates the choices To set vertical justification for a table cell follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Table from the menu 4 Click Cell Properties from the menu 5 The Cell Properties dialog box appears Click the down arrow to the right of the Vertical Alignment field Working with Table Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 548 6 Click your choice from the list and click OK Splitting a Cell You can divide a cell into two If you split a cell each cell occupies one half the size of the original cell Row before split Row after split To split a table cell into two cells follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell that you want to split Working with Table Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 549 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Table 4 Click Split Cell from the menu 5 Two cells no
96. menu via its content folder Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 334 menus module navigation link on a Web page This section describes each option Editing a Menu via its Content Folder To edit a menu from a content folder follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 345 2 Click the Edit button 3 The Edit Menu screen is displayed 4 As necessary change the fields in Edit Menu screen by referencing Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 321 5 Click the Save button Editing a Menu via Menus Module To edit a menu via the Menus Module follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 347 2 Click the Edit button 3 The Edit Menu screen is displayed 4 As necessary update the fields in Edit Menu screen by referencing Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 321 5 Click the Save button Editing a Menu via Navigation Link on a Web Page To edit a menu via a navigation link on a Web page follow these steps Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 335 1 Navigate to the Web page that contains the link to display the menu 2 Click the menu link 3 The menu appears 4 Click t
97. next field press lt Ctrl gt lt Tab gt Using Netscape If the eWebEditPro XML editor is one of several fields on a page and your browser is Netscape your Webmaster needs to create custom toolbar buttons that let you move into and out of the editor This procedure is described in the eWebEditPro XML Developer s Reference Guide Section 508 Compliance Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 568 Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse As explained in Customizing Your Toolbar on page 436 the eWebEditPro XML toolbar consists of one or more toolbar menus Menus have buttons that you click with the mouse to perform actions such as copying text This section explains how to perform those actions without using the mouse 1 With the cursor in the eWebEditPro XML editor press the application key 2 A menu appears 3 Press the down arrow key to select Menus Menus becomes highlighted 4 Press lt Enter gt A new menu lists all toolbar menus available to you Section 508 Compliance Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 569 If your Webmaster has given you access to all standard toolbar menus the menu looks like this 5 Press the down arrow key to select the toolbar menu that has a button that you want to use 6 A new menu appears listing all options on the selected menu The following menu displays what might appear if y
98. of the buttons on the screen After you enter the necessary information and click the Save button the file is copied Now users with permissions to the selected folder can insert the file into their content Field Description Title Enter a title for the file to be copied Filename Enter the folder path to the file to be copied You can use the Browse button to find the file Description You can enter a full text description to help other users identify this file The Description appears on the View File screen It also accompanies the file on the Search Results screen if the user selects Mixed when viewing the search results See Also Displaying Search Results on page 214 Button Name Description Preview View file to make sure it s correct before uploading it Note An application that can display the file must be installed on your computer Save Add file to the library Back Return to previous screen Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 218 Viewing Files Once a file is copied to the library you may preview it To preview a copied file follow these steps 1 Navigate to the library folder to which the file was copied 2 Click the file you want to preview 3 The View File screen appears The table below describes each field on the screen Field Description Title Title assigned by user who copied or edited it Filename Fil
99. on page 37 2 If your system supports more than one language you can select an edition of the content in a particular language via the language dropdown list illustrated below Collections View and work with collections assigned to this folder Working with Collections on page 295 Menus View and work with menus assigned to this folder Working with Menus on page 316 Search Look for content in the folder Searching the Workarea on page 55 View Properties View the folder s properties Button Name Description More Information Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 41 3 Click the content 4 The View Content screen appears After you select the content you have the following options NOTE Your options may vary according to your permissions and the status of the content Button or Tab Name Description For more information see Properties Content Properties View the content s properties Properties on page 43 Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 42 Content View Content Displays content Summary Edit Summary Edit content s summary Adding a Content Summary on page 82 Metadata Edit Metadata Edit content s metadata Adding or Editing Metadata on page 86 Comment View Comment View comments on changes made
100. on page 592 Note Although you can search for content blocks by any status when the search results appear and you click a content block to view it only the most recently published version appears If a version has never been approved nothing appears Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 69 Search data fields are defined by your system administrator and applied to content by its author or editor They are custom defined so would be different for every site The search data fields in the sample illustration above are only an example of what they might look like Fields that Apply to MS Office Files Only Tips on Responding to Search Criteria Fields If the search field is a text field you specify contains or not contains Then a text field appears to the right Here enter the search text for that field For example if the field is Last CMS Editors Last Name and you insert Johnson into the text field the search finds all files authored by anyone whose last name is Johnson If the search field is a date field the dropdown list lets you choose Before Between or After Search criterion Description Size of Document As displayed on the read only Size field on the File Properties window s General tab Number of pages As displayed on the read only Statistics Pages field on the File Properties window s Statistics tab Number of slides
101. on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 321 7 Click the Save button 8 The View Menu screen reappears Now the View In drop down list displays the menu s new language Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 354 9 Add items to the menu See Adding a Menu Item on page 325 If adding content you can only insert one in the selected language 10 Later you can add more menu items edit them delete them view them etc These capabilities are described in this chapter By Accessing the Menus Report Screen 1 From the Workarea screen click Modules gt Menus 2 Click the menu you want to translate 3 Click the menu and the Edit Menu option 4 The View Menu screen appears for the selected menu 5 From the Add drop down list select the language into which you want to translate the menu Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 355 6 The Add Menu screen appears Complete the screen for the menu in the selected language See Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 321 7 Click the Save button 8 The View Menu screen reappears Now the View In drop down list displays the menu s new language 9 Add items to the menu See Adding a Menu Item on page 325 If adding content you can only insert one in the selected language Later you can add more menu items edit
102. on the menu The content can reside in the selected folder or any of its subfolders 2 In the View Language dropdown list select the language of the menu you want to create 3 Click the View Menus button 4 The View All Menus screen appears 5 Click the Add button 6 The Add Menu screen appears 7 At minimum a menu requires a title If you want to add more information click Advance Settings When you do the lower section of the screen appears as shown below Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 321 8 Using the following table complete the fields on the Add Menu screen Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen Field Description Title The name given to the menu by the creator It appears on the Web page to indicate the kind of information on the menu Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 322 Image Link You can have an image appear next to or instead of the menu title For example To do this follow these steps Note Before beginning these steps the image must reside in the library if it does not add it before proceeding For more information see Copying Files to the Library on page 216 1 Click the image icon 2 The library window opens 3 Navigate to the folder that contains the image you want to use 4 Click the Insert button to insert it Using Im
103. opens with the content block inserted 5 From the Edit Content window you can edit content create or edit a summary specify metadata for the content enter or update a comment enter or update start and end dates review and update Web Alert information To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual chapter Web Alert Feature save changes check in content submit content for approval publish content to the Web site access the library 6 Make the necessary edits to the content See Also Table of Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists on page 424 Or you can choose a toolbar option or tab from the top of the Edit Content window These options are described in Buttons on the Add Content Screen on page 48 and Tabs on the Add Content Screen on page 48 Translating Content to Another Language NOTE The following procedure only works with HTML or XML content You cannot translate other file types as described below Use this procedure when you want to initialize a new foreign language content item with content from a source language This copying should facilitate the translation For example an editor is translating content from French to German The editor copies the French edition to new content whose language is German As the editor translates the French edition into German he deletes the French content Any images in Working with Folde
104. or Editing Metadata on page 86 Submit Publish Submit content into approval chain If you are last approver in the approval chain the publish button appears If you click it the content is immediately posted to Web site View Staged Published View Staged button displays content that hasn t been published yet View Published button displays content live on the Web site Staged Content on page 599 Delete Submit a request to delete the content into approval chain If you are the last or only approver the content is immediately deleted Example of an Approval Chain on page 98 Back Go to previous window Appendix A Content Statuses Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 596 Checked Out Content If content has a red border it was checked out by a user other than you If you checked it out the border is green While in this status other users are prevented from editing the content The content remains checked out until it is checked in by the user who checked it out or your system administrator Each option you may perform on checked out content is described below Submitted Content A yellow border shows that a user has submitted the content into the approval chain The border remains yellow until the content is published or declined While the content is in the approval chain no user can check it out Button Name Description Check In Che
105. or in any way transferred without the prior written consent of Ektron This Agreement and its performance and all claims arising from the relationship between the parties contemplated herein shall be governed by construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of New Hampshire without regard to conflict of laws principles thereof The parties agree that any action brought in connection with this Agreement shall be maintained only in a court of competent subject matter jurisdiction located in the State of New Hampshire or in any court to which appeal therefrom may be taken The parties hereby consent to the exclusive personal jurisdiction of such courts in the State of New Hampshire for all such purposes The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is specifically excluded from governing this License If any provision of this License is to be held unenforceable such holding will not affect the validity of the other provisions hereof Failure of a party to enforce any provision of this Agreement shall not constitute or be construed as a waiver of such provision or of the right to enforce such provision If you fail to comply with any term of this License YOUR LICENSE IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED This License represents the entire understanding between the parties with respect to its subject matter YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT THAT YOU UNDERSTAND THIS AGREEMENT AND UNDERSTAND THAT BY CONT
106. page 187 Exporting Form Reports on page 191 Viewing Form Information on page 192 Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 146 Editing a Form on page 198 Mailto or Database Form on page 199 Deleting a Form on page 200 View Form Toolbar on page 200 Creating Polls and Surveys on page 202 Overview of Form Processing The Structure of Form Data Forms reside within the content folder or one of its subfolders A form consists of the following components Form title ID number whether the form data is sent as email and or saved to a database etc Content information title start and or end date status postback message etc Form fields plain text field password field text area hidden text choices checkbox select list calendar submit button etc Step For more information see 1 Create a form Creating a New Form on page 147 2 Assign it to a Web page Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 184 3 Site visitor goes to your Web site and completes form Form is mailed to an email address saved to a database or both 4 View submitted form data and download it to a spreadsheet Viewing Form Reports on page 187 Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 147 the Ektron C
107. page 312 3 Click the Collections button NOTE If you access the collection via the Collections folder you cannot choose the collection s folder It is automatically placed in the Content folder 4 Click the Add button 5 The Add Collection screen appears Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 303 6 Complete the screen using the following table 7 Click the Save button You can now assign content to the collection See Assigning Content to the Collection on page 305 Default Template vs Quicklinks You can specify a template that determines the screen display for a collection when it is published on a Web page See your system administrator for information about Ektron CMS400 NET templates Or you can disable the template and instead use Quicklinks to Field Description Title Assign a unique title to the collection Template Enter the default template for the collection This template is used to display the content of the links generated if no template is assigned in the custom function If left blank the links use their respective Quicklinks See Also Default Template vs Quicklinks on page 303 Description Add a more detailed description for the collection Include Subfolders Check if you want to add to the collection content in subfolders of the content folder Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 N
108. page 343 External Hyperlink Editing an External Hyperlink Menu Item on page 343 Submenu Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 321 Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 345 When viewing a menu via the content or menu folder you get an internal view of information entered by menu creator When viewing via a navigation link on a Web page you get an external view of the menu as seen by anyone navigating Web site View a Menu via its Content Folder To access a menu via its content folder follow these steps 1 Access the Workarea and navigate to the content folder that contains the menu 2 Click the View Menus button 3 The View All Menus screen displays a list of menus in that folder 4 Click the menu you want to view 5 The menu s options appear The following illustration describes the icon accompanying each option Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 346 6 Click More Info to view the details about the menu 7 The following information appears on the More Info section of the View Menus screen Name Description Information about menu items See Editing a Menu Item via its Content Folder on page 335 Title Title assigned to the menu folder ID ID number assigned to the menu by Ektron CMS400 NET Note The menu ID is automatically generated when you cre
109. program Adding a Content Summary Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 83 Creating Summaries There are two ways to create summaries for a new content see Creating a Summary on New Content on page 83 for an existing content see Creating a Summary for Existing Content on page 84 Creating a Summary on New Content 1 Navigate to the folder in which you want to create the content 2 Click the Add Content button The Add Content screen appears 3 Insert a Title and content See Also Adding Content on page 45 Adding a Content Summary Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 84 4 Click the Summary tab 5 Enter summary information for the content The summary can include images files and hyperlinks Its length can be restricted by your system administrator in the configuration setup screen 6 When done click the appropriate button Creating a Summary for Existing Content 1 Navigate to the folder that contains the content 2 Click the content 3 The View Content screen appears 4 Click the Summary tab to enter or edit summary information for the content The summary can include images files and hyperlinks Its length can be restricted by your system administrator in the configuration setup screen 5 When done click the Save button 6 The View Content page reappears The status of the
110. right Unordered List Button Menu Format gt Unordered List Keystroke None Begin the line on which the cursor rests or all selected lines with a bullet Ordered List Button Menu Format gt Ordered List Keystroke None Begin the line on which the cursor rests with a number If the line above this line is not numbered assign this line 1 numbered assign a number one more than the line above Decrease Indent Button Menu Format gt Decrease Indent Keystroke None Decrease the current line s indent distance from the left margin Command Access to Command Description Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 590 Increase Indent Button Menu Format gt Increase Indent Keystroke None Increase the current line s indent distance from the left margin List Properties Button None Menu Format gt List Properties Keystroke None Launches a dialog box that allows you to view and edit the properties of an ordered or unordered list Highlight Color Button Menu Format gt Highlight Color Keystroke None Adds a color Highlight to text Color Button Menu Format gt Color Keystroke None Choose the color of the text Superscript Button None Menu Format gt Superscript Keystroke None Make text appear in Superscript Subscript Button None Menu Format gt Subscript
111. specify the number of pixels at the Width field Specifying Horizontal Alignment You can specify your table s horizontal alignment left right or center within the browser Alignment Example left right Manipulating Your Table s Format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 527 If you specify right or left justify you can wrap text around the table To do this move the cursor to the right or left of the table and begin typing Specify the table alignment at the Horizontal Alignment field on the Layout area of the Insert Table dialog box center Alignment Example Manipulating Your Table s Format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 528 Table Backgrounds You can specify a background color or image for your table Specifying a Table s Background Color You can assign a background color to a table to make it more pleasing to the eye Here is an example NOTE If you apply a dark background color to a table you may want to apply a light foreground color to the text Use the font color button to change the text color To assign a background color to your table click the Background Color field on the Insert Table dialog box When you click that field a color dialog box appears Click the color that you want to apply to the background of the table Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box 1 Click the q
112. subfolder to see its content The following graphic illustrates the location of Ektron CMS400 NET s major features from the Smart Desktop The Workarea and Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 24 From the Smart Desktop you can also Modify the Display of Top Level Folders on page 24 Hide the Left Panel of the Workarea on page 26 Modify the Display of Top Level Folders The display of top level folders can appear in two formats The Workarea and Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 25 The full display is easier to see but the icon format allows more space for the folder structure You can decide which option best suits your needs Switching Between Full Buttons and Icons By default top level folders appear as full buttons To switch the display of all folders to icons double click the down arrow circled below To switch back to full buttons double click the up arrow circled above You can also switch the display of folders one at a time by clicking the up or down arrow As an alternative method of switching the display you can 1 Place the cursor on the bar above the display of top level folders The bar has several dots in the middle Format Illustration A full button with an icon and text An icon on the bottom of the left frame The Workarea and Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET Us
113. table is selected small squares surround it Summary Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 573 Caption Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 573 Horizontal Caption Alignment Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 573 Vertical Caption Alignment Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 573 Abbreviation Cell properties dialog Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog on page 575 Categories Cell properties dialog Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog on page 575 Information Where applied For more information see Section 508 Compliance Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 572 3 Click the Tables button 4 Click Table Properties 5 The Table Properties dialog appears 6 Click the Accessibility button NOTE Your system administrator can add or remove the Accessibility button from the Insert Table dialog 7 The Accessibility dialog appears Section 508 Compliance Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 573 Accessibility Dialog Respond to the fields in the dialog They are described below Field Description Heading Rows If you want your table to have a horizontal header enter the number of rows that it should occupy Beginning with the top all cells in the specified number of rows are designated as table headers Hea
114. the language drop down select the language in which to create the form 4 Click the Add button The New Form screen appears Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 149 NOTE When you choose Standard Poll or Blank Survey the amount of steps in the Forms Wizard changes from five steps to four steps This happens because the Assign Tasks step is removed See Also Steps to Create a Poll on page 203 and Steps to Create a Survey on page 205 5 Choose the form that you want to begin with You can click the preview icon next to any sample form to preview it before choosing it You should select the sample that most closely matches the form you want to create After you create it you can add fields remove fields modify possible responses etc 6 Click the Next button 7 Enter or edit the form s Title and Description Title used to reference the form within the Workarea required Description an extended description of the form 8 The next screen lets you assign a task to a user or user group If you do a task will be created every time a site visitor submits this form See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 184 9 A new screen lets you determine what happens after the site visitor completes the form The choices are Display a message See Composing the Postback Message on page 150 Redirect to a file
115. the workflow to perform on the content 6 When the historical version is placed in the approval chain and approved it is published to the Web site Comparing Historical Versions After you select an historical version of content you can view the differences between it and the current version To compare an historical version follow these steps 1 Select an historical version of the content from the left pane 2 Click the View Differences button The historical and the current versions are compared To learn more about the comparison see Comparing Versions of Content on page 104 Removing Applied XSLT You can only remove an applied XSLT when viewing historical versions of XML content If you remove the applied XSLT you can view the content without the irrelevant XML tags The following table compares the views Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 116 With XSLT Without XSLT Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 117 Content Workflow Reports The reports folder contains several reports to help you manage the workflow of content through Ektron CMS400 NET In most cases you choose a report that corresponds to the content s status then view all content in that status If appropriate you can perform tasks on selected content For example you can check in checked out con
116. they are replaced by underscores Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 167 Validation Options Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below Default value If you want to set a default value for this field enter it here For example if this field collects a city and most users enter New York enter New York as the value Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field See Validation Options on page 167 If you assign to this field any value other than No validation the field is initially surrounded by red dashes in Data Entry mode If the user s response does not meet the validation criterion the field remains surrounded by red dashes The system administrator determines whether or not the user can save an invalid document Error Message Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s response to this field does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is telephone number the error message could be Please enter 7 or 10 digits It would appear if the user entered for example S061882 By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion you choose You can use this field to customize its text Note You ca
117. to help site visitors find content on your Web site illustrated below This kind of metadata also appears on the Search screen used to find content within the Workarea For more information see Entering Custom Metadata on page 87 Adding or Editing Metadata Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 87 Metadata that resides in the source code of a Web page Examples include the title and meta tags This data makes it easier for search engines to find your Web page illustrated below For more information see Entering Title and Keywords on page 91 Entering Custom Metadata Your system administrator defines the metadata that can be added to content The metadata being collected can be customized for each folder When you create or update content you can define metadata using fields that the administrator specified NOTE In order to add metadata to content an administrator must have created definitions for it in the language of the content For example each document stored in the Document Management functionality has a unique part number Your system administrator adds a custom search field called Part Number and specifies that only numbers can be inserted into the field When you add a document to Ektron CMS400 NET you access the content s metadata and insert the correct part number for the document illustrated below Adding or Editing Metadata Ektron CMS400 NET User M
118. well as those letters embedded in other words such as others and theater If you want the search to find only whole word occurrences of the text you type into the Find what field click the Match whole words only box in the Find dialog box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 453 Checking Spelling The eWebEditPro XML editor can check your spelling as you type or whenever you want to check it The rest of this section explains Disabling Script Blocking on page 453 Checking Spelling as You Type on page 453 Checking Spelling Upon Demand on page 454 Spell Checking Selected Text on page 455 Setting Spell Check Options on page 456 Disabling Script Blocking If Norton Antivirus TM 2001 is installed on your computer you need to disable script blocking in order to use the spell checker If you do not disable script blocking an error message will appear whenever you check spelling To do this follow these steps 1 Launch Norton Antivirus TM 2001 2 From the first window click Options 3 On the next window click Script Blocking 4 On the script blocking window uncheck Enable Script Blocking 5 Press OK Checking Spelling as You Type You can have the editor check spelling as you type To turn on the spell check as you type feature click the automatic spell check button Checking Spelling Ektron CMS400 N
119. when editing content This comment also appears on the View Content and Content History screens Tasks Add edit tasks Add or edit tasks for this content Managing Tasks on page 381 Web Alerts Add edit Web Alerts Add or edit Web Alerts for this content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual chapter Web Alert Feature Edit Content Open content for editing Editing Content on page 49 View History View older versions of content restore older version Viewing and Restoring Previous Content on page 111 View Staged Displays staged content Staged Content on page 599 View Difference Compares current and earlier versions of content Comparing Versions of Content on page 104 Delete Delete content Deleting Content on page 52 Move Copy Content Move or copy content to another folder This button is only available to administrators To learn more about it see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Check for content linked to this content Identify all content with Quicklinks to this content Checking for Broken Quicklinks on page 54 Button or Tab Name Description For more information see Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 43 Properties The content properties screen contains information about the content Add Task Attach a task to content Task Module Toolbar on
120. whose state is Awaiting Data Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column On Hold All whose state is On Hold Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Pending All whose state is Pending Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Reopened All whose state is Reopened Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Completed All whose state is Completed Change to the following state Archive Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Folder Displays these tasks Action you can perform from view screen Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 399 Sorting Tasks By Task Type On every View Task page you can sort tasks by the Task Type assigned to the task You sort by Task Type using the Show Task Type drop down box It is located in the upper right corner of the Workarea NOTE Task Types only appear in the Show Task Type dropdown box when they have been added to a task To sort by Task Type click the drop down box and choose a Task Type Words in bold Italics are Task Categories You cannot sort by Task Categories Sortin
121. will be used whenever you view as HTML The settings are ignored when you view the page in WYSIWYG mode and when the user views the page 3 To return to normal view click the View as WYSIWYG button or right click the mouse and click View WYSIWYG Editing a Section of a Page If you want to edit only a section of the HTML on your Web page follow these steps 1 Select the portion of your Web page that you want to edit 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Edit Source from the menu The HTML code appears 4 Edit the HTML code as desired 5 Click OK Inserting Source If you want to insert HTML source code into your Web page follow these steps Working with HTML Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 565 1 Place the cursor at the spot on the page where you want to insert the HTML 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Insert Source from the menu 4 The Insert Source dialog box appears Paste or type your HTML code 5 Click OK Cleaning Source Code eWebEditPro XML lets you clean the HTML source code for your Web page You would typically use this feature after entering HTML text or pasting HTML code into eWebEditPro XML from another application The Clean Source option removes unnecessary HTML tags ensures that all tags begin and end properly and maximizes the page for efficiency As a result the page should be error free and load more quickly in a
122. will move down to the next row 4 After you place the menu where you want it release the mouse button Creating a New Menu 1 Place the cursor on the toolbar 2 Right click the mouse 3 A dropdown list appears Click Customize Customizing Your Toolbar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 441 4 The Toolbar Customization dialog box appears 5 Click New 6 A new menu appears on the left side of the window above the existing menus The default name of the new menu is Custom 0 7 To rename the menu place the cursor in the field that displays the new menu and enter the new name Customizing Your Toolbar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 442 NOTE If you click outside the toolbar name field you cannot later change the menu s name 8 To have the menu appear on your toolbar click in the small box to the left of the menu name 9 Click the Commands tab 10 Add buttons to the menu following the procedure described in Using the Customize Toolbar Dialog Box on page 439 Moving a Menu Off the Toolbar You can move a menu from the toolbar to anywhere else on the screen even if eWebEditPro XML does not occupy the entire screen You can also change the orientation of a menu that is not on the toolbar from a horizontal to vertical To move a menu follow these steps 1 Place the cursor on the double vertical bars t
123. 0 100 required A whole number from 0 to 100 email address a a a where a is one or more characters email address list Several email addresses Each address s format is a a a where a is one or more characters The user must separate each address with a semicolon Zip code US 5 nnnnn or 9 digits separated by a dash after the fifth nnnnn nnnn Zip code US required 5 nnnnn or 9 digits separated by a dash after the fifth nnnnn nnnn A response is required Social Security US Nine digits in this pattern nnn nn nnnn Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 169 Inserting a Password Field Use a password field when you want the user to enter a password A password is like a text field but the user s entry appears as dots instead of characters This prevents an onlooker from seeing the password A user s password entry cannot exceed 18 characters To insert a password field follow these steps 1 Place a plain text field onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 157 2 The following dialog appears Social Security US required Nine digits in this pattern nnn nn nnnn A response is required Postal Code Canada ana nan where a is an alphabetic character and n is numeric Postal Code Canada required ana nan where a is an alphabetic character and n is numeric A response is required Social Insurance N
124. 0 NET s main screens To access it from wherever you are working in Ektron CMS400 NET click the button in the top left corner circled below The Smart Desktop consists of three sections illustrated below The Workarea and Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 22 The right frame displays Content awaiting approval content that you need to approve before it proceeds to the next approver or is published if you are the final approver See Also Approvals Reports on page 127 Content currently checked out all content in a checked out status This content cannot be edited by other users until the user who checked it out or the system administrator checks it in See Also Checked Out Report on page 130 A list of tasks assigned to you See Also Managing Tasks on page 381 Any form submission tasks assigned to you See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 184 The Content to Expire Report see Content to Expire Report on page 135 NOTE The number to the right of each category lists the quantity of content items in that category for you When you click an item up to five content items in a category appear To perform tasks on that content and to view additional content in that category click the category If you select a folder from the left frame the right frame displays content in that folder If you select content from the list
125. 0 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 267 6 Click the Add Content button 7 The Insert New Document Object screen appears NOTE The list of object types is determined by the applications installed on your computer For example an MS Project file type only displays if MS Project is installed 8 If the document does not yet exist check the Create New button Then select the type of document you want to create and press OK If the document already exists see Importing One Office Document on page 270 9 The application assigned to the document type appears within Ektron CMS400 NET 10 Enter a Title and add content to the document 11 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if the content should be searchable 12 If desired add a summary metadata a schedule and comments See Also Adding a Content Summary on page 82 Adding or Editing Metadata on page 86 Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 75 Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 268 13 If desired you can edit the document s properties See Also Editing a Document s Properties on page 268 14 Check in or submit the content for publishing as you would a content block See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 269 and Adding Content on page 45 Editing a D
126. 0 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 458 Editing in Microsoft Word If your computer has Microsoft Word 2000 or greater you can edit content within Word You may prefer to do this because of familiarity with Word s user interface and to use additional functionality available in Word NOTE Some Word formatting may not be compatible with HTML and as a result not be transferred to eWebEditPro XML To edit with Word follow these steps 1 Open eWebEditPro XML 2 Press the Word toolbar button 3 The following dialog may appear warning you that some Word formatting may not be transferred back to eWebEditPro XML Press Yes if you still want to edit in Word 4 Microsoft Word opens Any content that was in eWebEditPro XML when you pressed the Word button is copied to Word 5 Edit content as desired 6 Press File gt Close 7 Another warning like the one in Step 3 may appear Press Yes to copy the edited content back to eWebEditPro XML 8 When done return to eWebEditPro XML and press the Word toolbar button again Editing in Microsoft Word Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 459 9 If you change your mind and decide to restore the content to the way it was before you edited it in Word press the undo button If you want to restore the Word changes after pressing Undo press the redo button Uploading an Image in a Microsoft Word
127. 203 CMS400Example in the above example Notice that the content title is copied to the email s subject line Performing Actions on Folders Menu options Menu Option Description For more information see Collapse Close the selected folder and all its subfolders Note This option only appears if the selected item is an open folder A minus sign next to the folder indicates it is open see illustration below Collapse All Close all open folders under the selected folder Expand Open current folder and all its subfolders Note This option only appears if the selected item is an open folder A minus sign next to the folder indicates it is open see illustration below Expand All Open all open folders under the selected folder Open Display content in the selected folder in the right frame Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 252 Search Search for content within the selected folder or its subfolders Searching for CMS Content on page 243 Add to Favorites Add selected folder to My Favorites folder Favorites on page 254 Adding a Folder to the Favorites Folder on page 258 Manage Configurations Use Configuration Change the combination of user and server you are using to view folders and content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Ektron Explorer gt Configuring Ektron Explorer Refresh Refresh S
128. 30 adding library asset as 329 adding submenu 331 adding to submenu 331 adding via content folder 325 adding via modules folder 326 adding via navigation link on Web page 327 definition 317 deleting via content folder 351 via menus module 352 editing content block 339 external hyperlink 343 library asset 343 submenu items 344 via content folder 335 via menus module 337 via navigation link 338 rearranging 348 moving from toolbar 442 multi language issues 352 rearranging on toolbar 440 removing from toolbar 437 structure 317 submenu definition 318 template link field 324 translating 352 URL link field 323 viewing via content folder 345 via menus module 347 via navigation link 348 merge cell toolbar button 433 merging cells 549 metadata definition 86 Microsoft Word editing in 458 editing XML documents 459 uploading image from 459 multi language menus 352 N number toolbar option 430 numbers in words spell checking 456 O objects absolute positioning 431 Office 2000 inserting content from 566 Office documents creating 266 editing properties 268 importing one 270 importing several 272 279 Office documents document manage ment feature 263 open file toolbar button 434 open WebImageFX command 495 oval WebImageFX command 496 overwrite button 36 P padding cell 551 password changing 409 paste toolbar and menu option 426 paste as new image WebImageFX command 497 paste text toolba
129. 400Example products aspx In the illustration above if the user moves the cursor over Products the assigned menu appears However if the user clicks Products as indicated by the hand he jumps to CMS400Example products aspx Entering the Path to the Landing Page This path must be relative For example 400Sample index aspx This URL path can be a static template path like the one mentioned above or a dynamic path such as 400Sample index aspx id 25 Target Select how the library menu item will display Popup Opens in a new browser window Self Opens in the same window Parent Opens in the parent window Top Note By default the target option is set to self Link See Template Link on page 324 Field Description Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 343 Editing a Library Asset Menu Item To edit a library menu asset via its content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Navigate to the menu whose items you want to edit by referencing Viewing a Menu on page 344 2 The View Menu screen displays the menu items 3 Click the edit icon next to the library asset you want to edit 4 The Edit Menu Item screen opens 5 Make changes to the library asset menu item For documentation of the fields see Fields on the Edit Menu Item Screen on page 340 6 Click the Save button Editing an Exte
130. 5 Click on a link to open the documentation or Web page NOTE Your computer requires an internet connection to access the help page on Ektron com Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 417 Introduction to eWebEditPro XML eWebEditPro XML is a browser based Web content editor designed for dynamic Web sites It lets you create and publish your own Web content in any language supported by the operating system and your Web site More specifically eWebEditPro XML lets you perform Web page editing functions such as copy content from any Windows based application use Microsoft Word to edit Web content cut copy and paste find and replace text check spelling edit an image change font style size attributes bold italics underline and color begin lines with bullets or numbers adjust indentation right center or left justify text and images add a bookmark hyperlink image or table view your text as WYSIWYG or HTML code insert or clean HTML source code You gain access to these functions either from the toolbar at the top of the editor window or from a menu that appears when you right click the mouse inside the editor Introduction to eWebEditPro XML Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 418 Using eWebEditPro XML eWebEditPro XML is like many other word processing applicat
131. 5 Splitting a Cell 548 Merging Two Cells 549 Word Wrap 550 Setting Cell Padding and Spacing 551 Using Bookmarks 553 Using Hyperlinks 557 Working with HTML 563 Section 508 Compliance 567 Moving the Cursor into eWebEditPro XML 567 Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse 568 Section 508 Tables 570 Inserting Comments within Content 577 Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients 581 Appendix A Content Statuses 592 Active Content 593 Checked In Content 594 Checked Out Content 596 Submitted Content 596 Marked
132. 543 2 A large question mark appears next to your cursor 3 Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Spanning Rows or Columns You can create a table cell that stretches across more than one row or column In the following table notice how the row that contains Sports Teams spans three columns You can also create a column that spans several rows as illustrated below Notice that Boston spans three rows Sports Teams City Baseball Team Hockey Team Boston Red Sox Bruins New York Yankees Rangers Chicago White Sox Black Hawks Colleges City Name Boston Boston College Northeastern University Boston University Working with Table Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 544 Spanning More than One Row or Column To have a table cell span more than one row or column follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell that will span rows or columns 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Table from the menu 4 Click Cell Properties from the menu 5 The Cell Properties dialog box appears In the Rows Spanned or Columns Spanned field enter the number of rows or columns that you want this cell to span 6 Click OK Effect of Spanning a Cell When you set a cell to span rows or columns the editor does not remove the cells that
133. 594 Check out Checks out content to edit prevents others from simultaneously working on it Checked Out Content on page 596 Collection Accesses the collection area for content lets you create edit and delete collections See Also Working with Collections on page 295 Decline Declines an approval request submitted to you Delete Deletes selected item Delete Content Deletes multiple content items at once Delete Folder Deletes current content folder Do Not Apply XSLT Removes XSLT applied to XML content viewed in the content history area Edit Edits content or specific criteria in the Workarea Insert Library Item Inserts selected library item into content See Also Library Folder on page 208 Link Check Identifies content with a hyperlink to the current content You would typically use this feature to remove the links before deleting content If you do not remove the links they are inoperative after the content is deleted Button Name Description Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 36 Overwrite Replaces an image or file with a newer version See Also Overwriting Files on page 220 Preview Previews item that was or will be added Publish Save and publish the content Remove Removes items from folders and lists in the Workarea Reorder Changes the sequence of links in a collection See Also
134. Border Color field on the Insert Table dialog box When you click that field a color selection box appears Click the color that you want to apply to the table s border Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box 1 Click the question mark in the top right corner Manipulating Your Table s Format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 533 2 A large question mark appears next to your cursor 3 Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Assigning Border Size You can also adjust the size of a table border Size is measured in pixels To assign a border size to your table enter a number of pixels into the Border Size field on the Insert Table dialog box Manipulating Your Table s Format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 534 If you set a table s border size to zero 0 but wish to view the table s boundary lines while you are editing it select the table and click the border button Boundary lines will appear while you are editing but disappear when a user views the page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 535 Working with Table Cells Along with functions for managing tables described in Introduction to Tables on page 509 and Manipulating Your Table s Format
135. CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 246 The menu options may change depending on your permissions for the content Selecting Content To perform most actions you must first select content To do this move the cursor to its title until it changes to a hand see illustration Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 247 Table of Options Menu Option Description For More Information see Edit Edit selected content Editing Content Using Ektron Explorer on page 249 Add to Favorites Cut Removes selected content from folder after you move to another folder and Paste it Copy Makes a copy of selected content You then move to another folder and Paste it Paste Pastes content you recently Cut into selected folder Rename Change the title of selected content Delete Delete selected content Its status must be Approved Deleted content must go through the approval chain before it is removed If you are the last approver in the chain the content is deleted immediately See Also Approving Declining Content on page 94 Send to Email Insert a link to the selected content into a new email Using the Ektron Explorer to email Content on page 250 New gt Folder Create a new folder under the selected content s folder Note After creating a new folder move the cursor to the left frame right click the mouse a
136. Content Opens the editor and creates new content in the current folder Adding Content on page 45 Add several content items Open a new window that lets find and transfer non CMS files to Ektron CMS400 NET Using the Document Management Functionality on page 261 Add Folder Adds a subfolder to the current folder Adding Subfolders on page 72 Archived Content If current content is being displayed switch to display archived content If archived content is being displayed switch to display current content Setting Archive Options on page 79 Delete Folder Deletes the current folder Note You cannot delete the Content folder Deleting Folders on page 74 Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 40 Viewing Content You can view all content in your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Viewing content allows you to see the content metadata summaries and other information To view content in Ektron CMS400 NET follow these instructions Viewing Content from a Web Page To view content from a Web page follow these steps 1 Sign in 2 Browse to the content you want to view 3 Click the Properties button 4 Continue reading from The View Content screen appears on page 41 Viewing Content from the Workarea 1 Navigate to the folder that contains the content as explained in Viewing a Folder
137. Description Start Date Click the calendar icon to display a calendar From it select a start date Technical note If you see a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windows Control Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make sure the settings apply to the default user End Date Click the calendar icon to display a calendar From it select an end date for the series of recurring events Event will occur Select the frequency of the event from among the choices For documentation of See Start Time Start Time on page 371 Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 375 5 Click the Save button Viewing a Calendar Event Once events are added to a calendar you can easily view them To view a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the Show Calendar screen for the calendar that contains the event you want to view as described in Viewing a Calendar on page 365 End Time End Time on page 371 Display the times for the event Display the times for the event on page 372 Hyperlink Hyperlink on page 372 Launch Link in New Browser Launch link in a new browser on page 372 Event Types Event Type on page 373 For documentation of See Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET
138. Document If you insert an image into the Word content and then paste that content or save it the following dialog box appears The box lists all images in the content and asks if you want to copy them from your computer to your organization s Web server If you are ready to publish your Web content and want to display the image click Update Now If you plan to add more content later you can click Upload Later and upload all images at that time Editing XML Documents If your organization has implemented eWebEditPro XML you cannot edit XML documents using Microsoft Word This is because Word does not support XML editing If a full XML document is loaded the Word button is disabled Editing in Microsoft Word Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 460 If a Word document includes some custom XML tags the following dialog appears warning you about the problem You can proceed and edit using Word or decide not to edit using Word Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 461 Inserting Images To insert a picture into the editor place the cursor where you want the image to appear and click the Insert Picture button When you click the button one of the two Picture Properties dialog boxes illustrated below appears depending on how your Webmaster has set up your system The dialog boxes are very similar with the only difference being that the Select Serv
139. ET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 304 determine the page template See Also Quicklinks and Forms on page 229 If you specify a template all content in the collection uses the same screen elements other than the specific content For example the page header footer and information in the right frame of the screen are all the same On the other hand if you use Quicklinks every page in the collection uses its original template As a result the surrounding information may change for every content item in the collection Here is an example of links using Quicklinks Notice that content uses several templates As a result when a user clicks content in the collection the screen information around the content changes according to its template Here is an example of links when using a template named index asp In this case all pages have the same information surrounding the content Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 305 To toggle between a default template and Quicklinks follow these steps 1 Access the Edit Collection screen for the collection you want to edit 2 Modify the Template field 3 Click the Save button Assigning Content to the Collection After a collection is created your next step is to assign content to it To do so follow these steps NOTE When viewing a Collection on the Web site the last published versio
140. ET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 454 When you click the button the spell checker reviews every word in the file A wavy red line appears under any word whose spelling is not found in the system s dictionary The spell checker continues to review each word as you type it marking any words not in the dictionary NOTE Depending on the speed of your computer there may be a short delay between the time you type an incorrect word and when the wavy red line appears Also the spell check does not check a word until you enter a space character after the word Fixing Spelling Errors There are two ways to fix a spelling error indicated by a wavy red line Click the misspelled word and then right click A menu displays words that are similar to the misspelled word Click the correct word If you know the correct spelling type the correction Checking Spelling Upon Demand If you do not want to use the spell check as you type feature you can begin spell checking whenever you wish To do this click the spell check button When you do the system checks each word in the file If the spell check finds a word in none of the dictionaries it displays the Spelling dialog box Checking Spelling Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 455 The Spelling Dialog Box The Spelling dialog box displays the word not in the dictionary in the Not in Dictionary fiel
141. Editor License You can use an Apple Macintosh computer to create and edit Ektron CMS400 content To get the most functionality from Ektron CMS400 NET on the Macintosh use the Safari browser When using a Macintosh to edit content log on to your site as if you were using a PC 1 Open a Safari browser 2 Navigate to your site s login page 3 Click the Login button If you have access to the Workarea the Workarea button appears and you can start editing While there are a few limitations when using the Macintosh with Safari to edit content almost all functionality is the same as using a PC The following functionality is different when using a Macintosh creating and editing HTML forms is not supported creating and editing XML Forms aka the Data Designer is not supported working with Document Management content is not available Using the Integrated Macintosh Editor The Integrated Macintosh Editor IME plays the same role on a Macintosh that eWebEditPro plays on a PC that of a content editor While both editors have similar functionality some functions are accessed differently with the IME Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 582 Ektron CMS400 NET clients only support the IME when used on an Apple Macintosh running the Safari browser If you use another browser such as Internet Explorer Firefox or Nets
142. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 Ektron Inc 5 Northern Blvd Suite 6 Amherst NH 03031 Tel 1 603 594 0249 Fax 1 603 594 0258 Email sales ektron com http www ektron com Copyright 2006 Ektron Inc All rights reserved EKTRON is a registered trademark of Ektron Inc Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 February 2006 For the latest version of this manual go to http www ektron com cms400 web cms aspx id 1701 documentation EKTRON INC SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT READ THIS BEFORE LOADING SOFTWARE YOUR RIGHT TO USE THE PRODUCT DELIVERED IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT USING THIS PRODUCT SIGNIFIES YOUR AGREEMENT TO THESE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT DO NOT DOWNLOAD CUSTOMER should carefully read the following terms and conditions before using the software program s contained herein the Software Downloading and or using the Software or copying the Software onto CUSTOMER S computer hard drive indicates CUSTOMER S acceptance of these terms and conditions If CUSTOMER does not agree with the terms of this agreement CUSTOMER should not download Ektron Inc Ektron grants and the CUSTOMER accepts a nontransferable and nonexclusive License to use the Software on the following terms and conditions 1 Right to use The Software is licensed for use only in delivered code form Each
143. Form Reports on page 187 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 164 Inserting a Hidden Text Field When the form is submitted this field can pass information that the site visitor doesn t need to know about such as a tracking number This is typically data to be stored in the database and or emailed along with the rest of the data To insert a hidden text field follow these steps 1 Place a hidden text field onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 157 2 The following dialog appears Fields on the Hidden Text Field Dialog Default value If you want this field to be checked when the screen first appears click True Otherwise click False Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Field Description Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 165 Inserting a Text Field Use a plain text field when you want the user to e
144. Fs txt files graphic files such as gif and jpeg etc NOTE The file types that can be uploaded are determined by your administrator If you try to upload the wrong type of file the following error message appears Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 263 Microsoft Office and Open Office Documents You can edit any Microsoft Office or Open Office file within the Content tab just like an HTML content block The host application s toolbar appears below Ektron CMS400 NET s tabs on the Edit Content screen You can insert summary metadata schedule comment and task information for the Office document From the View Content screen you can use standard toolbar buttons to perform actions such as view history submit for publishing and delete For more information see Working with Microsoft Office Documents on page 265 and Working with Open Office Files on page 276 Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 264 Managed Files Ektron CMS400 NET can track and manage any non Office type of file that runs on your computer for example PDF gif and zip When editing these file types the host application appears in a separate window The Ektron CMS400 NET View Content screen remains in the background You can use the host application to edit the file then switch to
145. However you can insert library assets from other folders for which you have permission 7 Select a library asset and click the Insert button 8 The Add New Item screen appears Use the following table to complete that screen 9 Click the Save button Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item To add an external hyperlink as a menu item via a content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 325 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 326 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page on page 327 2 Click the circle next to External Hyperlink 3 Click the Next button 4 The Add New Item screen is displayed 5 Complete the fields as needed Name Description Title Title of the library asset When you insert the asset the title is used for the title of the menu item You can change it if needed Browse Library If you want to insert a different asset click the Browse Library button to browse the library and select another asset Field Description Title Title of the new external hyperlink menu item Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 331 6 Click the Save button NOTE When adding an External Hyperlink menu item the URL does not get added to the library nor is an ID assigned to it So when you save the menu item
146. INUING THE INSTALLATION OF THE SOFTWARE BY LOADING OR RUNNING THE SOFTWARE OR BY PLACING OR COPYING THE SOFTWARE ONTO YOUR COMPUTER HARD DRIVE YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT S TERMS AND CONDITIONS YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT EXCEPT FOR WRITTEN SEPARATE AGREEMENTS BETWEEN EKTRON AND YOU THIS AGREEMENT IS A COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE RIGHTS AND LIABILITIES OF THE PARTIES Copyright 1999 2005 Ektron Inc All rights reserved LA10031 Revision 1 5 Trademarks All terms in this manual that are known to be trademarks have been capitalized Ektron Inc cannot attest to the accuracy of this information Use of a term in this manual does not affect the validity of any trademark The following trademarks might appear in Ektron manuals Active Directory ActiveX Authenticode BackOffice ClearType Developer Studio FrontPage IntelliSense JScript Microsoft MS DOS SharePoint Visual C Visual C Visual InterDev Visual J Visual J Visual Studio Visual Web Developer TM Win32 Win32s Windows Windows NT Windows Server TM Windows Server System TM Netscape Netscape Navigator Mozilla TM Firefox TM What s New in the 5 5 Release Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 i What s New in the 5 5 Release You can now create polls and surveys to be placed on your Web site See Creating Polls and Surveys on page 202
147. L s formatting capabilities to modify its size font color and other attributes Field Description Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 178 Inserting a Select List Field Use a Select List field when you want the site visitor to select from a predetermined list of choices Although similar to the choices field when you insert a Select List field the site visitor only sees the first option in a drop down box He must click the down arrow to see the remaining values and select one So the Select List field occupies less room on the screen than a choices field Also the site visitor can only choose on item on the Item List This section of the screen displays the items that you enter in the Value and Text fields Buttons near the bottom of the screen let you remove items from this list as well as rearrange them Place a check in the box of any item to be checked by default on the data entry screen If you do the user can accept the default or uncheck the item by clicking in the checkbox Note that if Only One is selected under Allow selection above only one item can be selected Field Description Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 179 list In contrast you can allow a visitor to select several choices if you use a choices field To insert a Select List field follow these steps 1 Place a Sel
148. ML Developer s Reference Guide Moving an Image to the Server If you insert an image from your computer into eWebEditPro XML content that image must be moved to the server when you save the content The image can only appear on Web pages that display it after you move it to the server When you save content that includes an image you inserted the following dialog appears Inserting Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 476 All inserted files appear in the dialog which also estimates how long it will take to move the files to your server If you do not want to wait that long to upload the files click Upload Later If you do this the images will not appear on the published Web content until you move them to the server You can also enter a Title for the image near the bottom of the screen If you do this text appears when the user reading the Web pages moves the cursor over the image Deleting a Picture If you want to delete a picture follow these steps 1 Move the cursor over the picture 2 Click the mouse to select the picture 3 Click the Cut button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 477 Editing Images WebImageFX lets you select an image from the content edit that image and then insert the updated image into the content Editing consists of several functions available on the toolbar such as brightening rotati
149. MS400 NET Administrator Manual section Working with HTML Forms gt Forms Must Use Template with FormBlock Server Control Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Working with HTML Forms gt Form Permissions Creating a New Form The screen you use to create a new form has five simple steps After you complete the steps you have a new form that s ready to collect the information you need To make the task even easier Ektron CMS400 NET provides sample forms that you can start with then customize As explained in Mailto or Database Form on page 199 form data can be emailed and or saved to a database Forms created using the procedure described below are saved to a database by default but not emailed To change either setting use the Edit Properties screen See Editing a Form s Properties on page 199 To create a new form follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new edition of a form in another language by copying an existing form and translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 432 NOTE For the steps to create a new poll see Steps to Create a Poll on page 203 For the steps to create a new survey see Steps to Create a Survey on page 205 1 Choose a content folder Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 148 2 From the content type drop down box choose Forms 3 From
150. Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 514 The following table lists the menu options and where to get more information on each Menu Option Description For more information see Insert Table Inserts a new table where the cursor is currently resting Creating a Table on page 510 Insert Row Creates a new table row above the row in which the cursor is currently resting Adding or Removing Rows and Columns on page 521 Insert Column Creates a new table column next to the column in which the cursor is currently resting Adding or Removing Rows and Columns on page 521 Insert Cell Inserts a cell to the left of the cursor in a table Delete Rows Deletes table row in which the cursor is currently resting Adding or Removing Rows and Columns on page 521 Delete Column Deletes table column in which the cursor is currently resting Adding or Removing Rows and Columns on page 521 Delete Cells Deletes the selected cells Merge Cells Combines the contents of two or more selected cells into one Merging Two Cells on page 549 Split Cell Divides a cell into two Each cell occupies one half the size of the original cell Splitting a Cell on page 548 Table Properties Displays and lets you edit table properties such as the number of rows and columns cell padding and borders The Table Properties Dialog Box on page 515 Cell
151. Properties Displays and lets you edit cell properties such as width and alignment The Cell Properties Dialog Box on page 517 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 515 The Table Properties Dialog Box The Insert Table dialog box lets you manipulate most elements of a table s appearance The following table lists the fields on this dialog box and refers you to the section that explains each field Table Dialog Boxes and Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 516 Field s Lets you specify For more information see Size Rows Columns The number of rows and columns in the table Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns on page 520 Layout Width Table width Specifying Table Width on page 522 Layout Horizontal Alignment The table s alignment across the Web page Setting Horizontal Alignment on page 545 Background Color The background color of the table Specifying a Table s Background Color on page 528 Background Image A background image for the table Specifying a Background Image for a Table on page 530 Borders Use Default Color Whether or not to use the default color gray for table borders Border Color If you do not use the default the color of the table border Assigning Border Color on page 531 Border Size The size of the table borde
152. Remove Hyperlink Remove a hyperlink Removing a Hyperlink on page 562 Library Insert a library file Adding a Library File to Content on page 224 Upload Files Upload any external files such as images to the server Moving an Image to the Server on page 475 Translate Translate content into another language Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Multi Language Support gt Working with Multi Language Content gt Translating Content gt Using Machine Translation Add Comment Insert a comment into the content Adding Comments to Content on page 578 Picture Insert a picture Inserting Images on page 461 Image Editor Edit an image Editing Images on page 477 Table Insert or edit a table Introduction to Tables on page 509 Edit in Microsoft Word Edit content in Microsoft Word Editing in Microsoft Word on page 458 Button Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Function For more information see Toolbar Buttons Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 428 Data Design Mode Switches to Data Design Mode Button only appears when eWebEditPro XML configuration enables the Data Designer feature Design Mode vs Data Entry Mode on page 179 Data Entry Mode Switches to Data Entry Mode Button only appears when eWebEditPro XML configuration enables the Data Design
153. Sample Data Table The poll or survey answers are displayed with the percentage of users who responded to each item Bar Chart The poll or survey answers are displayed with a bar graph This chart type is used when you want a quick visual representation of the responses Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 155 IMPORTANT You cannot chart data that is entered into a text box For example if one of the choices in a poll is Other and you have a text box available for site users to enter additional information the text in the text box is not charted However the fact that the a user chooses Other is charted Creating a Form s Content Here is an example of form content that you can create Pie Chart Displays a standard pie chart Poll or survey answers are color coded and the percentage of people who chose each answer is shown Combined Takes the Data Table and the Bar Chart and combines them together Chart Type Description Sample Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 156 Note that some fields are required and some provide a dropdown list of choices You can learn how to create such a screen by following the directions below The following topics explain how to create a form The Form Toolbar Options on page 157 Inserting Form Fields on page 158 Form
154. Scheduling Content to Begin and End Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 75 Scheduling Content to Begin and End Scheduling content lets you control when content becomes visible on the Web site Similarly you can remove content on a predetermined date and time When used together a start and end date can relieve you of much work by managing how long content is viewable on your Web site You can also set options for what happens to content after reaching its end date How Does It Work When you create or modify content you can select a go live date and time If you do and the content makes it through the approval chain Ektron CMS400 NET publishes the content to the live site at that time For example your company is having a sale of the century in a month and everything is ready except the announcement You decide to update your Web site to let the public know about the sale With this feature you create the Web content now and set it to go live a week before the sale This topic is explained through the following subtopics Setting a Start Date on page 75 Setting an End Date on Content on page 78 Setting Archive Options on page 79 Setting a Start Date To set a start date follow these steps Scheduling Content to Begin and End Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 76 1 Access the editor by adding new conten
155. See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 32 3 Click the down arrow next to the add dropdown list to view the document types you can add Submit document into approval chain Upon approval publish content to Web site Publish or submit for publishing or Save recent changes Use to save latest changes before continuing Save to DocServer Save file to local computer See Also The Work Offline Option on page 275 Work Offline Discard changes made in current editing session Undo Check out Action Document Management Menu Option Toolbar button Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 271 4 Select Office Documents 5 Click the Add Content button 6 The Insert New Document Object screen appears NOTE The list of object types is determined by the applications installed on your computer For example an MS Project file type only displays if MS Project is installed 7 Check the Create From File button 8 Click the Browse button and browse to the file you want to import into DM Click OK 9 The document appears within the host application 10 Enter a Title and add content to the document Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 272 NOTE If you want to retain the original document name insert the full filename into
156. Several new features have been added to the Ektron Explorer See Performing Actions on Content on page 245 Performing Actions on Folders on page 251 Favorites on page 254 and Recently Viewed Content on page 258 Open Office files can be imported then edited and published within Ektron CMS400 NET See Working with Open Office Files on page 276 What s New in the 5 5 Release Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 ii Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 i Table of Contents What s New in the 5 5 Release i Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET 1 What is a Content Block 1 Types of Content 5 Workflow in Ektron CMS400 NET 7 Editing Content 7 The Lifecycle of Content 8 Logging In and Out 10 Prerequisites 10 Logging into the Sample Web Site 10 Site Preview
157. T s editor only works with htm and xml files you should save the file using one of those extensions Display hide Borders Display or suppress table and cell borders Display hide Invisible Elements Display or suppress formatting characters that do not appear when content is published View Preferences Display a dialog that lets you change the appearance of the HTML source code About eWebEditPro XML Display a dialog box that shows your version of eWebEditPro XML and your license keys Delete Delete selected content Underline Ctrl U Make the text underlined Remove alignment Remove alignment settings applied to selected content Toolbar Buttons Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 435 Bookmark Create a bookmark Using Bookmarks on page 553 Horizontal Line Insert a horizontal line Print Ctrl P Print the editor content Select All Ctrl A Select all content Select None Deselect all selected content Button Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Function For more information see Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 436 Customizing Your Toolbar The eWebEditPro XML toolbar consists of one or more menus Each menu has one or more buttons You can recognize the beginning of a menu by the double vertical bars circled in the illustration This sample toolbar has four menus Your Webmaster determines
158. Web pages also known as Quicklinks Or if the page you are jumping to is not on the list enter the URL address of the destination Web page Each choice is described below Using a Quicklink Your Web master can add to the Hyperlink dialog box any number of Quicklinks that is Web addresses that you can link to simply by selecting an item from a drop down menu Quicklinks are quick because you do not need to enter or know the URL of the destination Web page your Web master has already stored that information for you To apply a Quicklink follow these steps 1 Select the source text or image Using Hyperlinks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 559 2 Click the Hyperlink button The Hyperlink dialog box appears 3 Click the down arrow to the right of the Quicklink field A list of Web pages that your Web master has pre loaded appears 4 Click an item from the list to select it 5 If desired you can use the Target Frame field to change the window in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 556 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 6 Click OK Entering a Hyperlink Manually To create a hyperlink follow these steps 1 Select the source text or image Using Hyperlinks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 560 2
159. Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 38 3 All content in the content folder and the selected language appear on the right side of the screen Subfolders appear in the upper left frame 4 To work with any folder or its content click the folder When you do its content appears in the right frame NOTE You can only view folders for which your system administrator has granted permission 5 If your system supports more than one language you can select content for a particular language or all languages using the language dropdown list illustrated below Each folder lists the following information about its content Field Description Title The name of the content Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 39 Each folder also provides the following toolbar options NOTE Depending on your permissions you may not see all toolbar buttons Language The language of the content ID The number assigned to the content by Ektron CMS400 NET It is used to retrieve the content from a database Status The status of the content See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 592 Date Modified The most recent date the content was added edited or published Last Editor The last user who accessed the content Field Description Button Name Description More Information Add
160. XML Your Webmaster installs eWebEditPro XML on your computer and determines which fonts and sizes are available Your system may not match the example below 2 Type the first two sentences This is some sample content You can make text bold italic and underlined with the push of a button 3 Double click the word bold to select it Then click the Bold button to apply bold to the word 4 Double click the word italic Then click the Italic button to apply italic to the word 5 Double click the word underlined Then click the underline button to underline the word Create a Hyperlink 1 Type You can also easily add hyperlinks 2 Double click the word hyperlinks so that it becomes selected 3 Click the Hyperlink button 4 The hyperlink dialog box appears Creating a Simple Web Page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 421 5 In the Link field after http enter www ektron com 6 Click OK Notice that the word hyperlink now appears in a different color When you save this Web page and a user views it if the user clicks hyperlink a new Web page will display Ektron s home page NOTE If your computer has an internet connection you can double click the hyperlink to test it Applying a Bullet to a Line of Text 1 Press lt Enter gt to move the cursor down to the next line 2 Type You can begin a line with bullets
161. a picture before inserting it click Preview on the right side of the dialog box 7 Click OK 8 The Picture Properties dialog box reappears Here you can change the picture s properties For more information see Adjusting a Picture on page 469 Setting a Border on page 470 Aligning the Picture on page 471 Adding Space around the Picture on page 473 Editing the Picture s Title on page 474 9 Click OK to insert the picture into the editor Using the Second Media Selection Dialog Box When using the second Media Selection dialog box you can insert a picture from any folder available to your computer whether the folder is on your computer or a remote computer or from the Web server Your Webmaster determines which pictures are available on the Web server To insert a picture from a folder available to your computer click Select New File navigate to the file of interest and click OK the Web server click the Select Server File button You are prompted to enter a User Name and Password Your Webmaster assigns these codes to you which are needed to copy the file to the Web server Inserting Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 468 Next the Image Explorer dialog appears illustrated below Navigate through the folder structure until you find the image Then click OK to insert the image into eWebEditPro XML
162. a poll or survey on a Web site see the Developer Reference Manual section Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Server Controls gt Poll Server Control To create a poll or survey you use the Forms Wizard Steps to Create a Poll To create a new poll follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new edition of a form in another language by copying an existing form and translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 432 NOTE For the steps to create a new form see Creating a New Form on page 147 For the steps to create a new survey see Steps to Create a Survey on page 205 1 Choose a content folder 2 From the content type drop down box choose Forms 3 From the language drop down select the language in which to create the form Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 204 4 Click the Add button The New Form screen appears NOTE When you choose Standard Poll or Blank Survey the amount of steps in the Forms Wizard changes from five steps to four steps This happens because the Assign Tasks step is removed 5 Choose Standard Poll You can click the preview icon next to any sample form to preview it before choosing it 6 Click the Next button 7 Enter or edit the form s Title and Description Title used to reference the poll within the Workarea required Description an exte
163. abet as well as common words Examples of common words are about after all and also Avoid entering such words into the Search Text field because the search ignores them To find the list of noise words search your computer for files named noise xxx where xxx is a three letter abbreviation for the language For example noise eng lists English noise words Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 65 You can open a noise file with a simple word processor program such as Notepad to view any language s noise words You can also edit the file For example you can remove words that users should be able to search on Specifying Match Criteria NOTE This field is only applicable if you entered one or more words in the text field From this dropdown list select criteria for how the search word or words must appear within the content of the files being searched Your choices are described below Match Criteria Examples The examples below assume you entered these words into the search text field Choice A search returns content that has All Words all words in the search field Any Word any word in the search field Exact Phrase all words in the order specified in the search field Contains match partial words any part of any word in the search field Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1
164. acters are treated as a single separation sequence That is multiple whitespace characters are ignored Detect All Blank whitespace characters are treated as any other character Other Options Ignore Case Determines whether comparison is case sensitive For example if you check this box the strings Bob and BOB are not highlighted because their only difference is the case of the characters Ignore Format Attributes Determines whether comparison ignores changes in text formatting attributes HTML Visual Analysis only Option Description Comparing Versions of Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 109 Content Area The content area displays the content comparison The following table describes the change indicators View Tabs When viewing content in the View Content Difference feature there are three view modes explained below Symbol Example Content state Plain black text Unchanged Yellow highlighted text Added Red struck through text Deleted View Description Diff Compares published version of content to staged version Comparing Versions of Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 110 To switch between views click the corresponding View tab First Use of the View Content Difference Feature The first time the View Content Difference screen is used on a client machine a simple installation prog
165. age 522 Specifying Horizontal Alignment on page 526 Table Backgrounds on page 528 Setting Table Borders on page 531 Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns Use the Size section of the Insert Table dialog box to specify the number of rows and columns in the table Manipulating Your Table s Format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 521 A row is a horizontal series of cells while a column is a vertical series If you know how many rows and columns the table will be enter those numbers If you don t know the number of rows and columns you need when you create the table estimate how many you need You can add or remove rows and columns later Placement of Inserted Row or Column If you add a row it appears above the row in which the cursor was resting when you pressed Insert Row If you add a column it appears on the left side of the table Adding or Removing Rows and Columns To add or remove rows and columns after you create the table follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell from which you want to add or delete Manipulating Your Table s Format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 522 2 Right click the mouse A menu appears 3 Click the appropriate action from the menu For example to add a row click Insert Row NOTE If you are working with nested tables and you add or remove a column
166. age file extensions are gif jpg tiff etc A file is type of computer file that can be launched from a browser such as Internet Explorer Examples include a Microsoft Word document and a PDF file A hyperlink is a commonly used or hard to remember Web address also known as a URL After you add hyperlinks to the library users can easily apply them to editor content So for example if the editor content is Contact Ektron the user can select the text click the library button select hyperlinks to find the Ektron hyperlink and apply that hyperlink to the text Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 209 Once the page is published a person reading it can click the text to jump to the Web address www ektron com A quicklink is a special kind of hyperlink that jumps to another content item on your Web site A regular hyperlink jumps to a Web page on the internet Whenever content is created if the Add to Quicklinks table box is checked a quicklink is created for it A form is a quicklink to HTML form content Whenever content is created a form link is automatically created for it Accessing The Library 1 Click the Workarea button or icon 2 Click the Library folder in the lower left corner of the Workarea Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 210 3 The Library folder ap
167. age to Replace Title Text Alternatively you can have the image replace the menu text so that only the image appears to indicate the kind of information on the menu To do this check the Use image instead of a title checkbox Field Description Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 323 URL Link After you create a menu your developer links it to text or an image on a Web page by modifying a page template As a result when a user reading that Web page moves the cursor over the text or image the menu appears In the illustration below the menu appears when the user moves the cursor over Products You can also assign a URL link to a menu using this field If you do and the user clicks the link text or image he jumps to the specified page For example in this field you assign the product landing page CMS400Example products aspx In the illustration above if the user moves the cursor over Products the assigned menu appears However if the user clicks Products as indicated by the hand he jumps to CMS400Example products aspx Entering the Path to the Landing Page This path must be relative For example 400Sample index aspx This URL path can be a static template path like the one mentioned above or a dynamic path such as 400Sample index aspx id 25 Field Description Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 324
168. ailable you cannot edit the Task Type after that To make the Task Type available see your administrator Task Type availability is explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrators Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Categories and Types gt View Categorization Screen gt Task Type Availability 5 Edit the information 6 Click Save 7 The Task Type information is changed Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 394 Creating a Task from the Web Site To create a task from a Web page follow these steps 1 Sign in 2 Browse to the content for which you want to assign a task 3 Right click the mouse to display a menu 4 Click the Add Task button IMPORTANT The Add Task button only appears if your system administrator has granted you permission to add tasks For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Permissions 5 The Add Task screen appears The content you were viewing is assigned to the task 6 Follow the directions in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 383 The only differences are the content s ID number and title appear on the screen the language of the content is the default language Creating a Task via the Content Folder The above section describes assigning tasks from the Tasks folder You can also assign task via t
169. al Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 159 information Then add buttons that let the user submit the data on the screen If you chose a sample form at the beginning the screen includes fields If you did not the screen has only a Submit button NOTE In addition to inserting fields you can add explanatory text lines images etc onto the form screen If you want to place fields in columns insert a table and place the fields within table cells The table below explains each field type you can enter Button Inserts this kind of field Description For more information see Checkbox User s response is either checked or unchecked Inserting a Checkbox Field on page 162 Hidden Text Field Information a site visitor doesn t need to know about Inserting a Hidden Text Field on page 164 Text Field Free text field user cannot format text Inserting a Text Field on page 165 Password A password field Inserting a Password Field on page 169 Text Area Same as Text Field except field scrolls vertically to accept more text Inserting a Text Area Field on page 172 Choices Several choices appear on screen User checks any number of appropriate boxes Inserting a Choices Field on page 174 Select Same as Choices except options appear in a drop down box and site visitor can only select one choice Inserting a Select List Field on page 178 Calendar Lets user
170. and changes to other cells in the column can affect the cell whose width you set Setting cell width only guarantees that the cell will not be less than the width you specify If you want to ensure that a cell s size does not change set all cells in a column to that width To specify a cell s width follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell whose width you want to set 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Table from the menu 4 Click Cell Properties from the menu 5 The Cell Properties dialog box appears 6 In the layout section of the dialog box enter the cell width at the Width field You can enter the width in pixels or percentage These choices are explained in Specifying Table Width on page 522 7 Click OK Inserting a Cell To insert a cell follow these steps Working with Table Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 537 1 Move the cursor to the right of where you want the new cell to appear 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Insert Cell from the menu The new cell appears to the left of the cell in which the cursor resides when you click Insert Cell The cursor cell and all cells to its right shift right to make room for the new cell In this example the cursor was in cell b when the user clicked Insert Cell Before After Deleting a Cell To delete one or more cells follow these steps 1 Move the cursor to the f
171. anual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 88 Then anyone visiting your Web site can find that document by its part number or a range of part numbers using the field on your Web site s search screen illustrated below Adding or Editing Metadata Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 89 NOTE When your system administrator sets up metadata he determines whether or not is it publicly viewable If it is the search field appears on the search screen that site visitors use along with the search screen in the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea If the data is not publicly viewable it only appears on the Workarea search screen Entering or Editing Metadata To enter or edit content s metadata follow these steps WARNING You may only edit metadata of content that is published checked in or checked out by you 1 Access the Edit Content screen for the content whose metadata you want to enter or edit as described in Editing Content on page 49 2 Click the Metadata tab 3 The Edit Metadata screen opens with the current metadata displayed In order to add metadata to content an administrator must have created definitions for it in the language of the content NOTE Your screen may differ from the example below Your system administrator determines the appearance of the Edit Metadata screen Adding or Editing Metadata Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revis
172. ar displays weekdays only Forward Only If a green check appears next to Show only events that fall after the viewing day and the user viewing the calendar is not logged in the calendar only displays events from the viewing date forward No past events appear A logged in user can view past calendar events Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 364 Event Type Label Indicates if event types are assigned to this calendar See Also Understanding Event Types on page 373 One section of the Add Calendar Events screen displays available event types and lets the user assign them to the event By default this text is Event Type Your system administrator can edit the text Event Types Available A green check means you can add event types to the calendar Event Types Required A green check means that when entering a calendar event you must assign an event type to it Instructions If this calendar uses event types text appears at the bottom of the screen that explains how to use the event type selection box By default this text is Select Event Type to View Your system administrator can change this text Show All Label If this calendar uses event types the list of event types appears at the bottom of the screen On top of the list is text indicating that all event types will appear on the calendar By default this text is Show All Your system a
173. are in the way Instead it moves those cells across or down to the next available position For example the following table has two rows and two columns New York Columbia University Colleges City Name Working with Table Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 545 If you set cell A to span two rows note that cell C moves across to make room for cell A This action pushes cell D to the next column Aligning Text Within a Cell Within a cell you can specify how your text aligns horizontally and vertically Setting Horizontal Alignment In the Cell Properties dialog box you can specify the horizontal alignment of a cell You have set the alignment to left center or right or left center right justify the text is justified down both left and right edges Many books use this alignment style This alignment is not supported by all browsers Working with Table Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 546 This example illustrates these choices To set horizontal justification of a table cell follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Table from the menu 4 Click Cell Properties from the menu 5 The Cell Properties dialog box appears Click the down arrow to the right of the Horizontal Alignment field 6 Click your choice from the
174. as last edited The advantage of this mode is that you can see a Web page as it will appear when published to your site Continue editing until you are satisfied with its appearance In Preview mode click the Preview button to switch to regular mode Logging In and Out Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 13 Toggling Site Preview To toggle site preview on and off follow these steps 1 Navigate to a page that includes the login logout button 2 Click the Preview button Regular View The most recently published version of content appears In this mode colored borders surround content when you move the cursor over it In regular view click the Preview button to switch to preview mode Button Appearance Status Description Logging In and Out Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 14 3 The Web site is now in preview mode 4 To turn preview mode off click the button on the login screen Logging Out of the Sample Site To log out of Ektron CMS400 NET follow these steps 1 Click the Logout button in the content s floating toolbar or click the Logout button on the Web page Logging In and Out Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 15 2 The Logout confirmation box appears 3 Click the Logout button 4 You return to the Web page from which you logged out However it is in s
175. ate a menu Language ID The decimal number representing the menu s language Path Path to the content folder that contains the menu Last User to Edit Last user to edit this menu Last Edit Date Date and time when this menu was last edited Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 347 The View Menu screen also provides the following buttons Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module To access the menu via the Modules folder follow these steps 1 From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus Date Created Date and time when this menu was created Description Description given to the menu Name Description Button Name Description More Information Add Menu Item Add item to menu Adding a Menu Item on page 325 Remove Menu Item Remove item from the menu Deleting a Menu Item on page 351 Reorder Menu Item Adjust sequence of menu items Reordering Menu Items on page 348 Edit Menu Edit existing menu Editing a Menu on page 333 Delete Menu Delete menu and its menu items Deleting a Menu on page 349 Back Return to previous screen Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 348 2 The Menus Report screen displays all menus Continue from the section Click the menu you want to view on page 345 View Menus via Navigation Link on a Web Page To a
176. ave this version of the file to your computer click Save to Local If you do a window appears Navigate to the desired folder then click the Save button If you want to select another file on your computer or network and save it under this name in Ektron CMS400 NET click Browse If you do a window appears Navigate to the desired folder then click the Open button The new file is saved under the old Ektron CMS400 NET name 9 Edit the managed file as well as its summary metadata schedule tasks or comments See Also Adding a Content Summary on page 82 Adding or Editing Metadata on page 86 Managing Tasks on page 381 Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 75 10 Save the file within the host application 11 Check in or submit the file for publishing as you would any content block See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 269 Importing Files via Drag and Drop You can import files to DM using drag and drop You can add one or several files using this method It doesn t matter whether the files are Office or Managed files NOTE If you upload a file using drag and drop whose type is not supported the Document Management functionality ignores it and moves on to the next file After the files upload a dialog reminds you which files types are supported See Also Supported Types of Documents on page 262 When you drag and drop a file into DM the file s nam
177. brary Item for any type of library item as described in Viewing Files on page 218 2 Click the Link Search button 3 A list of all content that references the library item is displayed You should edit that content before deleting the item Deleting Library Items You can delete obsolete items from the library By deleting an item you prevent users from adding it to their content A deleted hyperlink quicklink or form quicklink remains on your Web server so any existing links to them are not broken On the other hand if an item is a file or image the delete window displays an additional prompt Remove from the server that lets Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 224 you remove the item from the server This feature is available to help reduce disk space taken up by these files Before removing an image or file from your server you should review all content with links to it and remove or update the link To delete an item from the library follow these steps 1 Access the View Library Item for any type of library item as described in Viewing Files on page 218 2 Click the Delete button 3 The Delete Library Item screen is displayed 4 If appropriate check the box next to Remove from the server see above 5 Click the Delete button Adding a Library File to Content After a file is copied to the library users can add it to
178. browser Also the appearance of clean HTML is more consistent when viewed in different browsers To clean your HTML follow these steps 1 Right click the mouse 2 Click Clean Source from the menu 3 eWebEditPro XML cleans your Web page s HTML content Working with HTML Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 566 Inserting Content from MS Office If you paste text into eWebEditPro XML from a Microsoft Office 2000 or higher application such as Microsoft Word the following window appears For best results click Yes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 567 Section 508 Compliance This section explains how eWebEditPro XML complies with Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act a law enacted by the United States government that requires Federal agencies to make their electronic and information technology accessible to people with disabilities Specifically this section explains the following topics Moving the Cursor into eWebEditPro XML on page 567 Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse on page 568 Section 508 Tables on page 570 Moving the Cursor into eWebEditPro XML Using Internet Explorer If the eWebEditPro XML editor is one of several fields on a page and your browser is Internet Explorer move to eWebEditPro XML by pressing lt Tab gt until the cursor lands in the editor To move from the editor to the
179. button See Also Working with HTML Forms on page 144 Editing a Form s Content You can edit the content associated with the form by a variety of methods including Accessing the content by the floating toolbar on the Web page Editing the content by the View Form screen Accessing the content by the View Form content properties screen This section explains how to edit a form s content from the View Form screen To edit a form s content follow these steps 1 Access the View Form screen for the content as described in Editing a Form s Content on page 199 2 Click the Edit Content button 3 The Edit Content screen appears 4 Make the necessary changes to the form s content 5 If needed click the Postback Message Metadata Schedule Comment or Web Alerts tab to edit that information 6 Click a workflow button Submit for Publication or Publish Editing a Form s Properties See Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 193 Mailto or Database Form The Forms feature lets you create a mailto or a database form to use on your Web site When creating or editing a form you must specify the type of form you are creating The options are Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 200 Send it via email Store it in a database Send it via email and store in a database See
180. by its author or editor They are custom defined so would be different for every site The custom search fields appear below the Status field Fields that Apply to MS Office Files Only Search criterion Description Size of Document As displayed on the read only Size field on the File Properties window s General tab Number of slides PowerPoint As displayed on the read only Statistics Slides field on PowerPoint s File Properties window s Statistics tab Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 63 Search Screen The search screen prompts you to specify the kind of content you want to search for example HTML content blocks a search word or words how the search words must match the content in order for an asset to be found by the search search data criteria The search only returns content that meets your criteria Each feature is explained below Specifying the Kind of Content to Search Near the top of the screen four check boxes let you determine the kinds of content to search Check this box To search Content HTML content blocks Forms HTML forms Assets Assets See Also Using the Asset Management System in the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Include Archived Any of the above file types that have been archived See Also Setting Archive Options on page 79 Working with Folders and Content
181. by retyping it into this field User Language Select a language in which to view Ektron CMS400 NET Click the black down arrow on the right circled below to see a list of choices Email Address Enter a new valid email address Notification email is sent to this address unless the Disable E mail Notification field is checked To understand how email notification operates within the content workflow see Example of an Approval Chain on page 98 Also this address identifies the user sending Instant email See Also Sending Instant Email on page 29 Disable Email Notification Check this box if you do not want to receive notification email Work Page Size Your system administrator may let you change the work page values If he does the following fields are editable Otherwise you can only view the fields Width If desired change the width of the screen in which Ektron CMS400 NET appears The width in pixels must be between 400 and 2400 This field accommodates users who have larger monitors and or prefer a smaller resolution such as 1280 x 1024 Updating Your User Profile Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 410 Height If desired you can change the height of the screen in which Ektron CMS400 NET appears The height in pixels must be between 300 and 1800 This field accommodates users who have larger monitors and or prefer a smaller resolution such as 1280 x 1024 Di
182. cape Navigator a plain text box appears where the editor should be and you can add content as plain text or html code Below is an image of the Integrated Macintosh Editor in the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea Menu Items and Toolbar Buttons This section explains how to use the menu Items and toolbar buttons in the Integrated Macintosh Editor IME The menus are located above the rows of toolbars button across the top of the editor window illustrated below Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 583 The toolbar is the row of buttons across the top of the editor window illustrated below The menu items and toolbar buttons allow you perform functions such as cutting and pasting text inserting images and creating tables Table of Menu Items Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists The following table explains each menu item toolbar button and drop down list Command Access to Command Description Spelling Button Menu Tools gt Spelling Keystroke F7 Begin spell checker Automatic Spell Check Button Menu Tools gt Disable Check Spelling As You Type Keystroke None Turn on or off spell check as you type feature Accessibility Report Button None Menu Tools gt Accessibility Report Keystroke F8 Provides an report on how accessible your page is according to Section 508 WCAG Priority 1 and WCAG Priority 2 Ma
183. ccess the menu via a navigation link on a Web page follow these steps 1 Access the Web page on which your Web developer inserted the link to display the menu 2 Click the link that launches the menu on the Web page 3 A DHTML menu is displayed along with all menu items on the menu For information on how to display a menu on a Web page refer to the section on menus in the Developers Manual Reordering Menu Items To rearrange the items on a menu follow these steps Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 349 1 Navigate to the menu you want to rearrange See Viewing a Menu on page 344 2 Click the Reorder button 3 The Reorder Items screen appears 4 Click the item you want to move 5 Click the up arrow to move it up or the down arrow to move it down 6 When finished click the Save button Deleting a Menu Similar to editing and viewing a menu you can delete a menu via its content folder menus module You cannot delete a menu from the navigation link on a Web page Deleting a Menu via Content Folder To delete a menu via its content folder follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 345 2 Click the Delete button Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 350 3 A confirmat
184. ccessing Online Help To access online help for any screen click the help icon illustrated below When you do an online help screen appears Online Help Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 413 The following table describes the buttons available on every help screen Button Description Moves to prior topic in the manual This refers to the topic sequence arranged by the manual s author Moves to next topic in the manual This refers to the topic sequence arranged by the manual s author Divides the help into two panels The left panel displays the table of contents It also provides buttons for accessing the index and full text search The right panel continues to display help topics Highlight the current help topic s location within the table of contents Online Help Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 414 Accessing Online Manuals To access the help folder follow these steps 1 Access your Smart Desktop See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 21 Prints current topic Button Description Online Help Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 415 2 From the lower left frame click Settings 3 From the top left frame click Help Online Help Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 416 4 The help screen appears in the right frame
185. ce on this report indicates that it is due for review See Also Setting Archive Options on page 79 Each item on the report contains the following information Removing Expired Content from Site If you review content and decide it should no longer appear on your site follow these steps to remove it The content will be visible if you browse to it through the Workarea but won t appear to site visitors 1 From the Expired Content Report click the content 2 From the View Content screen click the Edit button 3 Click the Schedule tab Column Description Title Title of content ID ID number assigned to content by Ektron CMS400 NET Last Editor Last user to edit the content Date Modified Date and time the content was last updated Path Folder location of content in Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 134 4 Under Action on End Date click Archive and remove from site expire Expired Content Report The Expired Content report displays all content whose end date has passed Such content is no longer visible on the Web site Each item on the list contains the following information Editing Expired Content You may edit any content on the Expired Content report To do so follow these steps 1 Click the content you want to view 2 The View Content page is displayed 3 Using the toolbar
186. cintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 584 Word Count Button None Menu Tools gt Word Count Keystroke None Details the amount of words used in the editor Find Button Menu Edit gt Find Keystroke Control F Launches a dialog box that allows you to Find Find Next or Replace an occurrence of the string entered into Find field Cut Button Menu Edit gt Cut Keystroke Control X Remove selected text and graphics Place that data into temporary memory If you later cut or copy more information onto the clipboard the new information overwrites the original information Copy Button Menu Edit gt Copy Keystroke Control C Copy selected text and graphics into temporary memory Leave selected data where it is If you later cut or copy more information into memory the original information is lost Paste Button Menu Edit gt Paste Keystroke Control V Insert the most recently cut or copied text and graphics at the current cursor location Paste Special Button None Menu Edit gt Paste Keystroke None Paste text in a different format For example you can copy text from a browser and paste it as Rich Text instead of Hypertext Select Button None Menu Edit gt Select Keystroke None Similar to the Document Navigator this function lets you highlight a section of text a table or s
187. ck in content View Staged Published Click the View Staged button to view the content that has not yet been published Click the View Published button to view the content that is live on the Web site See Also Staged Content on page 599 Back Go to previous window Appendix A Content Statuses Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 597 See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 98 Each toolbar button is described below Button Name Description Submit Submit the content into the approval chain See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 98 Publish Approve and publish the content to the Web site Note You have this option only if you are the last approver in the chain See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 98 Decline Refuse to publish the submitted content and change its status to checked in Edit Check out the content and make changes to it Note If you edit the content you need to re submit it to the approval chain View Staged Published Click the View Staged button to view the content that has not yet been published Click the View Published to view the content that is live on the Web site See Also Staged Content on page 599 Appendix A Content Statuses Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 598 Marked for Deletion Content Content that is marked for deletion has been requeste
188. content changes to checked out to you NOTE When you enter or edit existing content s summary its status changes to checked out After you create the summary click the Check In button to check the content in From that point you need to submit or publish it Editing a Summary NOTE You can only edit the summary of content that is published checked in or checked out by you To edit the a content s summary follow these steps 1 Access the View Content page for the content whose summary you want to edit as described in Viewing Content on page 40 2 Click the Summary tab 3 The Edit Summary window opens Adding a Content Summary Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 85 4 Click the Edit button The summary opens within the editor 5 Make the necessary changes 6 Click the Save button 7 The summary is saved and the View Content page is displayed with a status of checked out NOTE When you edit an existing content summary it goes into a checked out state After creating the summary check the content back in From that point you must submit it or publish it Adding or Editing Metadata Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 86 Adding or Editing Metadata You can add two kinds of metadata to Ektron CMS400 NET content Metadata that can appear on your Web site s search page below the standard search fields
189. content items in their subfolders Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 140 Non Updated Count number of content items in each folder that have not been created or updated within the selected date range For every folder other than the top level folder which appears in blue the count includes content items in their subfolders Percentage of Stale Content The percentage of content items that have not been either created or updated within the selected date range Total Each column is summed at the bottom except Percentage of Stale Content which provides an average of the percentage of all folders Graphing the Report Data After viewing the report results you can display that data as a graph illustrated below The graph s orientation is vertical or horizontal depending on your response to the Report Display field To graph the results click the graph toolbar button Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 141 Search Phrase Report This report displays all terms that were entered into the Search Text Field within a selected range of dates You can use it to discover the kind of information site visitors are searching for Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 142 Selection Criteria You can narrow down the search by select
190. copy of the Software is licensed for use only on a single URL Each license is valid for the number of seats listed below the Basic Package Any use of the Software beyond the number of authorized seats contained in the Basic Package without paying additional license fees as provided herein shall cause this license to terminate Should CUSTOMER wish to add seats beyond the seats licensed in the Basic Package the CUSTOMER may add seats on a block basis at the then current price for additional seats see product pages for current price The Basic Packages are as follows Ektron CMS100 Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron CMS200 Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron CMS300 Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron CMS400 NET Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron eWebEditPro Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron eWebEditPro XML Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL For purposes of this section the term seat shall mean an individual user provided access to the capabilities of the Software The CUSTOMER may not modify alter reverse engineer disassemble or decompile the Software This software product is licensed not sold 2 Duration This License shall continue so long as CUSTOMER uses the Software in compliance with this License Should CUSTOMER breach any of its obligations hereunder CUSTOMER agrees to re
191. creates pages for display on the World Wide Web or an intranet These pages use HTML hypertext markup language to format text and images for display in a browser You do not need to know HTML to use eWebEditPro XML However if you know HTML you can view insert or edit your Web page s HTML code This section explains Viewing and Editing HTML on page 563 Inserting Source on page 564 Cleaning Source Code on page 565 Inserting Content from MS Office on page 566 Viewing and Editing HTML When you choose to view your page as HTML the editor cleans the content using a method determined by your Webmaster For more information see Cleaning HTML in the eWebEditPro XML Developer s Reference Guide To view your page s HTML follow these steps 1 Click the View as HTML button or right click the mouse and click View as HTML from the menu Working with HTML Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 564 2 The HTML code appears While viewing the code you can edit it using editor functions such as Cut Copy Paste and Replace To select all content press lt Ctrl gt lt A gt You can also set default values for the style size and color in which the HTML appears To do this right click the mouse and click Preferences When you do a dialog box appears in which you can enter formatting information about the HTML code These settings
192. creen after you choose this option Years list of calendar years ranging from 2004 to 2014 Item Value Enter the value that is collected when the data entry user selects this item For example if Interests appears in the Name field and you want music to be collected when the data entry user selects this item and saves the page enter music here Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 181 Customizing a Standard List You can customize any list of predefined choices For example you can change the calendar years so they begin in 1995 and run through 2020 To do this follow these steps 1 Choose the standard list that you want to customize 2 Change the value of the List field to Custom 3 All of the predefined choices appear in the Item List box 4 To add new items use the Item Value and Text fields delete an existing list item select it and click Remove rearrange the list use the Move Up and Move Down buttons edit a list item select it and press the Change button Item Text Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen After you insert this field onto the screen you can use eWebEditPro XML s formatting capabilities to modify its size font color and other attributes Item List This section of the screen displays the items that you enter in the Value and Text fields Buttons near the bottom of the sc
193. d suggested spellings for the word in the Suggestions field The most likely replacement is selected at the top of the list buttons that let you ignore the word change the word or exit Spell Checking Selected Text To check the spelling for a single word or a group of words follow these steps 1 Select the text that you want to spell check 2 Press the manual spell check button If you want to Do this Replace the word with one of the suggestions and continue spell checking the page 1 Click the suggested word 2 Click Change Replace every occurrence of the word with one of the suggestions and continue spell checking the page 1 Click the suggested word 2 Click Change All Correct the spelling of the word by typing it and continue spell checking the page 1 Click in the Not In Dictionary field 2 Correct the spelling 3 Click Change Leave the word as is continue spell checking the page You would normally do this if a word such as a company name is spelled correctly even though it is not in the dictionary Click Ignore Leave the word as is continue spell checking the page ignoring all other occurrences of the word Click Ignore All Stop spell checking Click Cancel Checking Spelling Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 456 3 The spell checker reviews the words in the selected text and stops at any word not in th
194. d email address in the User Information Screen The email s subject line is the form name The body of the email contains the following information for each field on the form name value submitted by user Field Value Title Form title as entered by the author Assigned to As set up by the user who created or edited the form Assigned by User who created or last edited form Priority Normal Task Category Form Submission Task Category Task type Form Submission Task Created by User who created or last edited form State Not started Due date Not specified Start date Not specified Description Data from form form name was received on date time form description Name of every field on the form value submitted by user into that field Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 187 Viewing Form Reports If a form is set to store data in the database you can run a report that displays the submitted data To view a form report follow these steps 1 Navigate to the folder for which you want to view the report 2 The View Content screen appears 3 Click the form you want to view If you do not see your form in the folder make sure the Content Type drop down box is set to All Types or Forms 4 Click the View Reports button 5 The View Forms Report screen appears 6 Enter report criteria using the following tab
195. d to be removed from the Web site by a user When content is marked for deletion it goes through the approval chain like content that is submitted for publishing When the content completes the approval chain it is deleted from the Web site See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 98 The table below describes the toolbar buttons Pending Start Date Content Content that is pending a Go Live date has been approved but its scheduled go live date and time have not occurred yet You cannot perform any action on content with a pending start date Back Go to previous window Button Name Description Button Name Description Delete Approve the deletion request Note If you are the last user in the approval chain the content is deleted when you click this Decline Refuse the deletion request This sends the content back into a checked in status Back Go to previous window Appendix A Content Statuses Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 599 Staged Content A staged version of content is one that is not published It can be content that is checked in or content that is approved with a pending a start date Staging lets you make changes to content while keeping it from the Web site until you are ready to publish it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 i Index 508 compliance 567 A about eWebEditPro box 431 434 absolu
196. determines which styles are available Heading Size Change the heading size Your Webmaster determines which heading sizes are available Font Style Change the font style Your Webmaster determines which fonts are available Note If more than one font appears in a selection the browser on the reader s PC tries to display text using the first font If the browser cannot find that font it tries to use the second etc Font Size Change the font size Your Webmaster determines which font sizes are available Font Color Change the font color Background Color Change the background color of the text Note To remove background color from selected text click the Normal button Button Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Function For more information see Toolbar Buttons Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 430 Bold Ctrl B Make the text bold Italic Ctrl I Make the text italic Strikethrough Apply strikethrough to selected text For example Here is some text Normal Remove all formatting from selected text Superscript Make selected text appear smaller and above text line Subscript Make selected text appear smaller and below text line Number Begin the line on which the cursor rests with a number If the line above this line is not numbered assign this line 1 numbered assign a number one more than the line above Bullet
197. ding Columns If you want your table to have a header enter the number of columns that it should occupy Beginning with the left column all cells in the specified number of columns are designated as table headers Summary If desired enter the table summary Non visual browsers can use the summary to explain the contents of the table Section 508 Compliance Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 574 After you complete the Table Properties dialog click OK to make the table comply with Section 508 Setting Abbreviation and Category Attributes You can modify abbreviation ABBR and category AXIS attributes within a table To do so follow these steps 1 Select one or more cells 2 RIght click the mouse 3 Select Table gt Cell Properties 4 Access the Cell Properties dialog The Cell Properties dialog includes fields that let you adjust the Abbreviation and Category Attribute field values see illustration below NOTE Your system administrator can add or remove the Accessibility fields from the Cell Properties dialog Caption If desired enter the table caption The caption appears centered below the table when viewed Horizontal Caption Alignment If desired enter the caption s horizontal alignment center left right Vertical Caption Alignment If desired enter the caption s vertical alignment bottom top Field Description
198. dministrator can change this text Long Description Lets the user enter additional text while adding a calendar event Field Description Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 365 The View Calendar screen may contain the following toolbar buttons that let you perform other tasks Viewing a Calendar NOTE This section explains how to view a calendar and enter calendar events from the Workarea Once a calendar is available on your Web site you can also perform these actions by logging in and navigating to the calendar on your site To view a calendar follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar screen for the calendar you want to see as described in Accessing the View Calendar Screen on page 360 2 Click the View Calendar button 3 The calendar appears Folder Name Name of content folder to which the calendar is assigned for permission purposes You can only add edit or delete events for calendars in folders to which you have been granted permission Folder Path Complete path to the calendar s content folder Field Description Button Name Description More Information View Calendar Show calendar in the Workarea Viewing a Calendar on page 365 Back Return to previous screen Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 366 See Also Tips on Viewing a Calendar on pag
199. drop an Open Office file into Ektron CMS400 NET See Importing Files via Drag and Drop on page 288 Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 277 1 From the Workarea navigate to the folder in which you want to place the file See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 32 2 The default language appears in the View dropdown list To save the Open Office file under a different language click the dropdown list and select the language 3 Click the down arrow next to the file types dropdown list to view the document types you can add 4 Select Open Office 5 Click the Add Content button 6 The following screen appears Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 278 7 Click the Browse button and navigate to the Open Office file that you want to import 8 Enter a Title NOTE If you want to retain the original document name insert the full filename into the Title field For example you could enter mydocument odt 9 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if it should be searchable 10 If desired add a summary metadata a schedule comments and Web alert information See Also Adding a Content Summary on page 82 Adding or Editing Metadata on page 86 Scheduling Content to Beg
200. e 367 4 If you want to view events of a certain type only click the Select Event Type to View drop down list illustrated below Then choose an event type See Also Understanding Event Types on page 373 The page is refreshed and the calendar displays events of that type only Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 367 From the View Calendar screen you can perform the following tasks Note that the Add and View buttons appear on each calendar day while the Return button is on the toolbar at the top of the screen See Also Working with Calendars on page 357 Tips on Viewing a Calendar The monthly calendar displays the current month In the intranet sample today is highlighted in yellow illustrated below At the top of the calendar are the previous and next months Click them to view those months Click on Action More Information Add Calendar Event Adding a Calendar Event on page 369 View Calendar Events Viewing a Calendar Event on page 375 Return to Previous Screen Return to previous screen Event title within calendar sample below Jump to calendar event s Web page if available Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 368 Where an event appears move the cursor over it to see a popup box with the event name location and start and end times If a W
201. e 82 Edit Metadata Change the content s metadata Adding or Editing Metadata on page 86 Appendix A Content Statuses Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 594 Checked In Content If content has a green border it could mean that the content is checked in A checked in content item is one to which changes were made after which it was checked in instead of being submitted or published When content is checked in it is accessible to all users who have permissions to edit it They can check it out and change it Keep in mind that the content seen on the template is not the same as the content in the editor view See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 98 Each option you may perform on checked in content is described below Delete Submit a request to delete the content If you are the last or only approver the content is immediately deleted See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 98 Adding Content on page 45 Back Go to previous window Button Name Description For more information see Appendix A Content Statuses Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 595 Button Name Description For more information see Edit Check out the content to change it Editing Content on page 49 Edit Summary Edit its summary Adding a Content Summary on page 82 Edit Metadata Edit its metadata Adding
202. e assigned task Note email is only sent if email notification is enabled for Ektron CMS400 NET Language Select the language of the user who will perform the task Content If this task involves a piece of content select it When you click Select a new window appears From this window you can navigate through folders to find the content You can only select a piece of content whose language matches the user language selected above See Also Selecting Content for the Task on page 387 Priority Select the priority of the task Your choices are High Normal and Low The priority appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by priority Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 385 Task Category Select a category for the task When a Task Category is chosen the Task Type drop down box is auto filled with task types associated with that category See Also Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 389 Task Type Select the Task Type for this task You must specify a Task Category before you assign a task type See Also Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 389 Add By clicking the Add link you can add Task Categories and Task Types See Also Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 389 Note If you Add a Task Category or Task Type while adding a task the task information Task Title Assigned To Language etc
203. e becomes its title The file is assigned a content ID and submitted to the approval process If either of the following is true the file s status is set to checked in you are required to complete metadata for the file the folder in which you are adding the file is set to create PDF documents when a file is published Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 289 If you add more than one file with the same name or the same file twice a number is assigned to the end of the title For example when adding a second test doc file the new file is named test doc 1 No information is added to Summary Metadata or Comments when a file is added via drag and drop You can edit this information by clicking Edit then the appropriate tab Steps to Adding Files via Drag and Drop 1 In the Workarea click the Content folder button 2 Select the folder in which you want to place the files 3 Open Windows Explorer 4 Find the files you want to upload NOTE You cannot drag and drop folders You can however grab all files in a folder and drag and drop them Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 290 5 From Windows Explorer drag and drop the files onto the Workarea s drag and drop window After you drag and drop the files the following screen appears Wh
204. e dictionary For documentation of options when a misspelled word is found see The Spelling Dialog Box on page 455 4 When the spell checker finishes reviewing the words in the selected text it displays the following message Finished checking selection Do you want to check the rest of the document Click Yes to spell check the rest of the document including text above the selected text Click No to stop the spell checker Setting Spell Check Options eWebEditPro XML can use Microsoft Word s spell checking feature your Webmaster makes this decision If your installation uses Word Word s Spelling amp Grammar window available from the Tools gt Options menu has settings that affect the operation of the spell check Checking Spelling Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 457 Specifically you can set the spell check feature to check or ignore words in UPPERCASE for example XYLOGIC words with numbers for example mp3 Internet and file addresses for example http www ektron com As an example if you check the box to the left of Ignore Words in UPPERCASE eWebEditPro XML s spell check does not consider words in all uppercase characters You also use the custom dictionary section of the screen to identify custom dictionaries for the spell check to reference The spell check feature does not use the other fields on this screen Ektron CMS40
205. e it to the other half of the screen 5 From Windows Explorer navigate to the folder that contains the file you want to insert into Ektron CMS400 NET 6 From Windows Explorer select the files you want to copy to Ektron CMS400 NET 7 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the files to the desired Ektron Explorer folder in the left frame Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 254 8 Release the mouse button A file upload message appears Favorites The My Favorites folder provides quick access to content or folders that you frequently work with Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 255 First identify frequently used content any folders as favorites Then when you want to work with them instead of navigating through the folder structure simply go to the My Favorites folder and select them NOTE You can also access favorite folders and content from the original location A favorite is not a copy of the original item it s merely a shortcut to it Displaying the Favorites Folder To display the My Favorites folder follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the left frame 2 Right click the mouse 3 A menu appears Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 256 4 Click Options 5 The Options dialog appears 6 Check Display Fa
206. eb page is linked to the event you can click the event name to jump to that page Click the number that represents any day to view detail for that day illustrated below From the daily view you can Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 369 see all events and the hours they span proceed to the previous or next day click a date in the upper left or right corner return to the month view by clicking on today s date view detail about an event by clicking on it From the event view illustrated below you can view the event s location and start and end times Click the date to return to the daily view Adding a Calendar Event NOTE You can only add a calendar event if you have add or edit permission for the calendar s folder To add a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the calendar to which you want to add an event as described in Viewing a Calendar on page 365 NOTE You can also add a calendar event after viewing the View Events screen See Also Viewing a Calendar Event on page 375 2 Navigate to the month and day for which you want to add a calendar event Your calendar display is determined by your system administrator Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 370 3 Click the Add Event button 4 The Add Calendar Event screen appears
207. ect List field onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 157 2 The following dialog appears Fields on the Select List Field Dialog Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 180 Field Description Descriptive Name Enter a description of the field This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 187 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below List Custom You create your own set of choices Use the Item and Item List fields to do this See Also Customizing a Standard List on page 181 Languages list of languages supported by Windows Countries list of all countries in the world U S States and Territories list of all states and territories that make up the U S Canadian Provinces list of all Canadian provinces Age Ranges Use the predefined choices for age ranges You can see the ranges on the screen after you choose this option Numeric Ranges Use the predefined choices for numeric ranges You can see the ranges on the s
208. ection of a table The menu is dynamic and the selections can change depending on the location of the cursor For example if the cursor is in a table the menu has the following entries html body table tr td and content Command Access to Command Description Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 585 Select All Button None Menu Edit gt Select All Keystroke Control A Selects everything in the editor Undo Button Menu Edit gt Undo Keystroke Control Z Reverse the most recent action as if it never occurred You can undo up to 50 actions Redo Button Menu Edit gt Redo Keystroke Control Y Reverse the undo action You can redo as many actions as you have undone Insert Hyperlink Button Menu Insert gt Insert Hyperlink Keystroke Control K Launches the Insert Hyperlink dialog box Adds hyperlink to text in the editor Bookmark Button None Menu Insert gt Bookmark Keystroke None Launches the Insert Bookmark dialog box Adds a bookmark to the content Remove Hyperlink Button None Menu Insert gt Remove Hyperlink Keystroke None Removes the hyperlink from text in the editor Files Images Hyperlinks Button Menu Insert gt Files Images Hyperlinks Keystroke None Launches the Library dialog box which allows you to add library items to the content Insert Symbol B
209. ectively restore some settings the Reset button automatically restores all of them Adding Space around the Picture On the Picture Properties dialog box you can use the Spacing fields Horizontal and Vertical to add space around the picture You enter a number of pixels to determine spacing value The bottom of the picture with the baseline of the text This is the default alignment Bottom Baseline The bottom of the picture with the bottom of the text AbsBottom To align Click this in the Alignment field Illustration Inserting Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 474 The following graphic illustrates the effect of adding spacing to a picture Editing the Picture s Title The title that you entered in the Insert Media Item dialog box defaults into the Title field of the Media Selection dialog box You can edit the title in this field if desired NOTE The title is also the alt text for the image The alt text appears in place of the image on the Web page if the image itself cannot display for any reason The Options Button When you click the Options button on the File Properties dialog box the options dialog box appears The box displays information about your connection to the Web server Inserting Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 475 For information about these settings see Uploading Images in the eWebEditPro X
210. ed below Inserting a Picture from the Server The top left corner of the dialog box Illustrated below lists the pictures on the Web server Inserting Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 465 Pictures that you previously inserted appear on this list as do pictures inserted by other users connected to that server To insert a picture from the server follow these steps 1 Click the picture from the To Select an Existing File field that you want to insert 2 Information about the picture s file size width and height appears in the upper right corner of the dialog box 3 If you want to view a picture before inserting it click Preview on the right side of the dialog box 4 Click OK 5 The Picture Properties dialog box reappears Here you can change the properties of the picture For more information see Adjusting a Picture on page 469 Setting a Border on page 470 Aligning the Picture on page 471 Adding Space around the Picture on page 473 6 Click OK to insert the picture into the editor Deleting a Picture from the Server To delete a picture from the server select the picture and click the Delete button Inserting Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 466 Inserting a Picture from Your Computer Use the lower left corner of the dialog box to insert pictures from your computer
211. ed content See Also Comparing Versions of Content on page 104 Back Return to previous screen Button Name Result of Clicking Approving Declining Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 98 5 The approved content is either submitted to the next publisher published immediately to the Web site or deleted depending on the approval chain set for the content Example of an Approval Chain The approval chain begins when a content contributor submits a new or edited content If email is enabled an email is sent to the next approver in the approval chain The following example follows a typical content block from creation to publication Three users make up this approval chain Sports Writer creates sports content Sports Editor edits and publishes all sports articles Editor In Chief edits and publishes all articles Each user has different permissions that correspond to their roles The example uses the following topics to explain a typical approval chain Creating Content on page 98 First Approver on page 99 Second Approver on page 101 Creating Content The first step is to create content To create new content follow these steps 1 Log in to Ektron CMS400 NET as a SportsWriter 2 Create content as described in Adding Content on page 45 3 Click the Submit button at the top of the window
212. ee the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Multi Language Support gt Working with Multi Language Content You can create an edition of any menu in every supported language When a site visitor selects a language navigates to a page that has a menu and clicks the menu link Ektron CMS400 NET displays the menu in the selected language if it is available If a menu in that language is not available nothing appears Before creating or translating a menu it s a good idea to create or translate all content that will be on the menu In this way you can link this content to the new menu However after creating a menu you can add new items to it Translating a Menu To translate a menu into any supported language follow these steps You can navigate to the menu via the Web site or from the Workarea Each procedure is described below Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 353 By Navigating the Site 1 Sign on to Ektron CMS400 NET and select the language in which the menu currently exists 2 Navigate to the page that has the menu you want to translate 3 Click the menu and the Edit Menu option 4 The View Menu screen appears for the selected menu 5 From the Add drop down list select the language into which you want to translate the menu 6 The Add Menu screen appears Complete the screen for the menu in the selected language See Fields
213. een The words can be in any order within the file Any Word Any Word is almost the opposite of All of the Words It works like an or function When you select this option the search returns all files that have at least one of the words entered in the search text field In other words it returns files with the word partners or content or Monday or employee or green Exact Phrase Exact Phrase returns content that have all five words in the order specified in the search text field A better example would be to search for a phrase such as Content Management Solution The search yields only content with that exact phrase Contains Match Partial Words Although you cannot search for wild cards the Match Partial Words option does almost the same For example enter at into the search text field then select Match Partial Words The search returns all content with the letters at finding words such as At Bat Chatter Atoll ATM etc Additional Search Criteria The next section of the search screen lets you choose one or more customized search criteria Note that if you enter more than one Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 61 criterion only content satisfying all criteria appears on the search results screen Fields that Apply to Content Forms and Assets Search criterion Description Title The title of the content form or asset You can
214. eft column To the right display the last edit date time folder name size assets only DMS rank assets only language status Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 72 Adding Subfolders To further organize content in your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site you can create subfolders to store related content NOTE The ability to add a subfolder is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see an Add Folder button on the View Contents of Folder screen you do not have permission to do so To add a subfolder follow these steps 1 Navigate to and click the folder under which you want to create a subfolder 2 The contents of the folder appear in the main section of the Workarea 3 Click the Add gt Folder 4 The Add Subfolder screen appears 5 Enter the required information in the fields Use the following table to assist you Field Description Folder name Enter a name for the subfolder Description Enter a full description of the folder Style Sheet Specify the style sheet that the content in the folder will use If left blank the folder inherits the style sheet from the parent folder Your system administrator should be able to assist you in choosing a style sheet Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 73 Templa
215. eld The choices are No validation response is not checked Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked Allow maximum of 1000 characters Site visitor s entry cannot exceed 1000 characters If you assign to this field any value other than No validation the field is surrounded by red dashes when it appears on your Web site Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 174 Inserting a Choices Field Use a Choices field when you want the site visitor to select from a predetermined list of choices You can allow the site visitor to select only one or more than one choice You can also determine the list of choices and the appearance of the list To insert a choices field follow these steps 1 Place a choices field onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 157 2 The following dialog appears Error Message Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s response to this field does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is Cannot be blank the error message could be Please enter a response By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion you choose You can use this field to customize its text Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that a
216. eleting 521 spanning 543 specifying 520 section 508 570 width setting by percentage 523 setting by pixels 525 tasks add button 34 assign button floating toolbar 4 assigning to content block 384 to HTML form 184 to user 384 comments adding 401 updating 403 creating via content block 394 via task folder 383 definition 381 deleting 404 due date 386 editing 400 priority assigning 384 redirecting to another user 384 relationship to content blocks 381 start date 386 state assigning 385 toolbar buttons 406 viewing 395 options 396 sorting options 399 template link field on Add Edit Menu screen 324 text aligning 430 in columns 512 within a cell 545 direction menu 431 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 vii indenting 430 remove formatting 430 replacing 449 searching 449 selecting 423 WebImageFX command 504 title bar displaying button text 410 toolbars buttons 34 424 collections 301 customizing 436 floating 4 buttons 4 redisplay 440 restore 440 trademark character inserting 428 toolbar and menu option 428 translate toolbar and menu option 427 twain acquire WebImageFX command 506 twain source WebImageFX command 506 U underline toolbar option 434 undo toolbar option 426 WebImageFX command 507 uppercase words spell checking 456 URL link field on Add Edit Menu screen 323 users email address editing 409 language editing 409 p
217. en DM uploads the files they appear in the Workarea If you do not see a file you selected to upload check the following your administrator allows the file type to be uploaded to DM Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 291 the Asset Types dropdown box is set to the type of file you are looking for Files upload to the correct category regardless of what is selected when you drag and drop them Drag and Drop File Uploading vs the Add Content Buttons Drag and drop lets you add files quickly without having to fill in details The details can be entered later A file added via drag and drop is submitted into the approval process for that folder Drag and drop requires fewer mouse clicks You choose a folder use Windows Explorer to find the files and drag and drop them The files are then added to DM Alternatively by using the Add Content buttons you can add supporting information summary comment and metadata while uploading When adding files using the Add Content buttons you can choose whether the files are published submitted to the approval chain checked in or saved See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 269 This process requires more mouse clicks than drag and drop You choose a folder an document type browse to the folder where the files are located add the details and publish the file
218. ename and location on the server Library ID ID number assigned by Ektron CMS400 NET when file was originally copied Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 219 If the file can be displayed in your browser a preview of it appears at the bottom of the screen If it cannot display in the browser a link to preview it in its host application appears instead NOTE You may need to download some files before you can be view them for example mdb mp3 zip etc The following table describes the buttons on the View Library Item screen Parent Folder File s parent folder Users need permissions to this folder to insert the file into content Last User to Edit Last user who changed file Last Edit Date When file was last edited Date Created When file was originally copied to library Description Optional full text description of file Field Description Button Description For more information see Edit the items title and description Editing a File on page 220 Overwrite the library item Overwriting Files on page 220 Find content linked to the library item Library Link Searching on page 223 Delete library item See Deleting Library Items in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Return to previous screen Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 220 Editing a File You can edit
219. enting on Web page 184 inserting fields 158 calendar field 182 checkbox 162 choices 174 hidden text 164 password 169 select list 178 text 165 text area 172 introduction 144 mailto 200 processing overview 146 reports exporting 191 reports viewing 187 structure of data 146 toolbar 200 toolbar options 157 validation 161 viewing 192 properties 192 viewing 230 freehand WebImageFX command 492 G gray content border color meaning 592 green content border color meaning 592 H height work page customizing for user 410 help online accessing 412 hide borders toolbar button 434 history button view floating toolbar 5 content accessing from Web page 50 112 accessing via Workarea 50 112 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 iv viewing 37 window 113 horizontal flip WebImageFX command 493 horizontal line inserting toolbar button 435 HTML cleaning 565 editing 564 inserting 564 view as toolbar and menu option 428 viewing 563 hyperlink edit toolbar and menu option 427 remove toolbar and menu option 427 hyperlinks 557 adding as menu option 330 creating 557 definition 208 editing 561 entering manually 559 library adding 227 adding to content 228 editing 227 viewing 227 preventing 562 removing 562 testing 560 to a bookmark in another web page 560 to content block finding 35 using a Quicklink 558 I icon menu 4 Ignore All field eWebD
220. enu Table gt Delete Cell Keystroke None Deletes a cell where the cursor is located in a table and shifts the remaining cells in that row to the left If multiple cells are selected they are deleted and the remaining cells are shifted to the left Split Cell Button Menu Table gt Split Cell Keystroke None Launches a dialog box that allows you to split a cell into multiple columns or rows This only adds columns or rows to that cell not the whole table Merge Cell Button Menu Table gt Merge Cell Keystroke None Choose multiple adjoining cells and merge them into one cell Command Access to Command Description Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 587 Cell Properties Button None Menu Table gt Cell Properties Keystroke None Launches a dialog box that provides information about the cell properties In this dialog box you can further define an individual cell Row Properties Button None Menu Table gt Row Properties Keystroke None Launches a dialog box that provides information about the row in which the cursor is located In this dialog box you can further define the row Column Properties Button None Menu Table gt Column Properties Keystroke None Launches a dialog box that provides information about the column in which the cursor is located In this dialog box you can further defi
221. er accessing 117 site update activity 136 restore toolbar button 36 restoring content 114 right to left editing 431 rotate WebImageFX command 501 rows table adding 521 deleting 521 spanning 543 specifying 520 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 vi S save to database toolbar button 36 WebImageFX command 501 save as WebImageFX command 502 save file to local computer toolbar button 434 scanning an image 506 scheduling content 75 search 449 considering case of search term 451 content folder 55 content using Ektron Explorer 243 direction 450 library 212 phrase report 141 toolbar button 36 whole word match 452 search screen 56 63 noise files 58 64 search criteria fields tips on re sponding to 69 specifying kind of content to search 57 63 match criteria 59 65 search data 67 word or phrase 58 64 searchable properties creating 89 editing 89 section 508 compliance 567 tables 570 select all menu option 445 toolbar button 435 select none toolbar button 435 select WebImageFX command 503 selecting text 423 server moving picture to 475 sharpen WebImageFX command 503 shortcuts keyboard 424 show calendar toolbar button 36 Site Update Activity Report 136 Smart Desktop definition 21 hiding left panel 26 modifying folder display 24 navigating 23 set as start location for user 410 Smart Detect field eWebDiff 108 space character inserting 428 spacing
222. er File button only appears on the second dialog box The Select Server File button appears if your upload mechanism is set to FTP It does not appear if the mechanism is HTTP For more information see the eWebEditPro XML Administrator Manual section Managing Image Selection gt Examples of Implementing Image Selection gt Selecting Files from the Server Inserting Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 462 Inserting Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 463 You can also access this dialog box to modify a picture after you insert it To do this follow these steps 1 Click the picture 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Picture from the menu If you see the first dialog box proceed to Using the First Picture Properties Dialog Box on page 463 If you see the second dialog box proceed to Using the Second Media Selection Dialog Box on page 467 Using the First Picture Properties Dialog Box When the first Picture Properties dialog box appears click the Select New File button When you do the Insert Media Item dialog box appears Inserting Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 464 This box and lets you insert a picture from your computer and any network folder available to your computer or from the Web server to which your computer is connected Both choices are describ
223. er Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 26 2 When the cursor turns to a double headed arrow drag it to the bottom bar To return the display to full buttons drag the same bar above Hide the Left Panel of the Workarea You can hide the left frame of the Workarea to provide more space for working in the right frame Below is an example of the Workarea with a minimized left frame Note that you cannot see the folder display in the left frame The Workarea and Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 27 To minimize the left frame click the white X near the top of the left frame The left frame remains minimized until you move the cursor to the left of the bar circled below The Workarea and Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 28 Using Auto Hide The Workarea screen also provides an autohide feature which quickly switches between full right frame view and combination right left frame view When autohide is turned on the left frame is minimized unless you place the cursor to the left of the bar circled above If you place the cursor there the left frame appears As soon as you move the cursor back to the right frame the left frame disappears To turn on the autohide feature click the push pin icon near the top of the left frame When you do the push pin turns 90 degrees to indicate autohide is on The Workarea and S
224. er feature Design Mode vs Data Entry Mode on page 179 View as WYSIWYG Display the page content as WYSIWYG What You See Is What You Get WYSIWYG is the ability to see in the editor what will appear when user views the Web page View as HTML Display the page content as HTML Viewing and Editing HTML on page 563 nbsp Insert a blank space character Although you can add spaces in the editor using the lt space gt bar on the keyboard those spaces are ignored when the content is displayed by a browser Copyright Insert copyright symbol Registered Trademark Insert registered trademark symbol TM Insert trademark symbol and Special Characters Insert special characters such as from a drop down list To view the list click the black down arrow Button Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Function For more information see Toolbar Buttons Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 429 Remove Style Remove all style information applied to selected text You apply styles using the Style dropdown list For example Before lt P class note gt This is initial content lt P gt After lt P gt This is initial content lt P gt Style Display a list of styles Users can select from the list to apply a style to selected text Note that the list can change depending on the formatting of the selected line Your Webmaster
225. er who made the edits is informed that the change is not approved The following graphic illustrates the content approval cycle Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 9 To help track content s position in this workflow Ektron CMS400 NET assigns a status to each content item The status determines what you can do with it and indicates what must occur in order for it to get published to the Web site For more information see Appendix A Content Statuses on page 592 Logging In and Out Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 10 Logging In and Out This section explains how to log in and out of Ektron CMS400 NET and to use the site preview feature through the following subtopics Prerequisites on page 10 Logging into the Sample Web Site on page 10 Site Preview on page 12 Logging Out of the Sample Site on page 14 Prerequisites Once your Webmaster or administrator installs Ektron CMS400 NET you need the following items before you can use it URL Web address of Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Username and password Once you acquire both you can log into Ektron CMS400 NET and begin managing Web site content NOTE This documentation uses the Ektron CMS400 NET sample Web site to demonstrate the product Logging into the Sample Web Site To access the Ektron CMS400
226. erform the following steps 1 Access the View Task page for the task as described in Viewing a Task from the Tasks Folder on page 395 NOTE You cannot edit a task after viewing it from the Content folder 2 Click the Edit button 3 The Edit Task screen appears 4 Edit the task 5 Click the Update button to save the changes Adding Comments to Tasks You can add comments to an assigned task if you want to provide additional information about its status For example if you update a task s status from In progress to Waiting on Someone Else you can use a comment to describe the status change such as left voice mail with John with questions about his changes to the home page Comments appear at the bottom of the View Tasks screen illustrated below Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 402 Several comments can be added to a task to record its progress from assignment to completion To add a comment to a task follow these steps NOTE When an approver approves declines content from the Content Awaiting Approval screen if the content has an active task the Add Comments to Task screen appears The screen lets the approver insert comments about the task associated with the content 1 Access the View Task screen for the task as described in Viewing a Task on page 395 2 Click the Add Comment button 3 The Comments window a
227. erver To do so click the Work Offline button If you do the document remains in a checked out state and only you or a system administrator can check it in to work on it again When you check it in the file on your local computer is loaded into the Workarea As a result you can edit the document on your local computer anywhere without a network connection When you are ready to return it to the document server check it in save it or submit it for publishing You must check the document in on the same computer on which you checked it out NOTE A system administrator can check in any checked out document If he does the most recently published document gets checked in Editing an Office Document After an Office document is saved follow these steps to edit it 1 From the Workarea select the document s folder See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 32 2 From the View Contents of Folder screen click the document 3 The View Content screen for the document appears 4 Click the Edit button 5 The document opens in the host application 6 Edit the document as well as its summary metadata schedule tasks Web Alerts or comments See Also Adding a Content Summary on page 82 Adding or Editing Metadata on page 86 Managing Tasks on page 381 Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 75 Using the Document Management Functionality
228. et file xls for further analysis If a form uses an XML structure each XML tag becomes a column header in the spreadsheet To export form data follow these steps 1 Access the View Form Reports screen for the report you want to export as described in Viewing Form Reports on page 187 Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 192 2 Click the Export Reports button 3 A File Download dialog box is displayed Choose the option that best suits your needs 4 After the data is exported you can analyze and modify the xls file Viewing Form Information You can view information about a form information about a form s properties Viewing a Form s Information After a form is created you can view its information in the Forms folder To view a form follow these steps 1 Access the folder that contains the form you want to view 2 Click the form you want to view 3 The View Form screen displays 4 The following table explains the information on the screen Field Description Form Title Title used to reference the form FormID ID number automatically assigned to form Status The form s current status Description Extended description for the form Form Data The type of form data Mail or Database See Also The Structure of Form Data on page 146 Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manua
229. ettings question marks appear instead of the characters Field Description Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 184 Implementing a Form on a Web Page After you create the form you need to link it to another page on your Web site You would insert the link as you would any form link See Adding a Library File to Content on page 224 Next open your Web Site navigate to the host page and click the hyperlink to access the form Now you can test the form and make sure it works as you expected If needed you can return to edit mode change the form and test it again until you are happy with it Assigning a Task to a Form While tasks typically help Ektron CMS400 NET users track content activities you can also assign a task to users or user groups whenever a form is submitted For example your Web site offers a free product demonstration to anyone who completes a form Whenever a site visitor submits the form a task is assigned to your sales department s administrative assistant He uses the information collected by the form to schedule a demonstration The sales manager can review the task history to audit sales leads and ensure demonstration requests are being handled in a timely manner To set up a task that it is assigned to users or groups whenever a site visitor completes the form follow these steps NOTE You should be familiar with tasks before begin
230. ew Preview content before it is published Properties Open content s View Content page Viewing Content on page 40 View Content Difference Display differences between a previous and published version of content Comparing Versions of Content on page 104 View History Open View History screen where you can view previous versions of content Viewing and Restoring Previous Content on page 111 Workarea Opens Workarea from which you can perform all Ektron CMS400 NET tasks The Workarea and Smart Desktop on page 16 Button Name Description More Information Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 6 When creating new content you must assign a type As you can see the Type dropdown lists the kinds of content you can work with Type Description For more information see HTML content Content designed to be published on the World Wide Web For information on using Ektron CMS400 NET s editor see Introduction to eWebEditPro XML on page 417 Forms Online forms designed to collect information from site visitors Working with HTML Forms on page 144 Office Documents Files normally created and edited using Microsoft Office Working with Microsoft Office Documents on page 265 Managed Files Files created outside of Ektron CMS400 NET such as PDFs and jpeg files You cannot create or edit these file
231. f you want to set a default value for this field enter it here Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field The choices are No validation response is not checked Cannot be blank Response is required The for mat of the response is not checked Minimum of 8 characters with at least one digit Site visitor s entry must be at least 8 characters and include one digit If you assign to this field any value other than No validation the field is surrounded by red dashes when it appears on your Web site Error Message Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s response to this field does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is Minimum of 8 characters with at least one digit the error message could be Please enter at 8 or more characters with at least one digit By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion you choose You can use this field to customize its text Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks appear instead of the characters Field Description Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 172 I
232. fore then he sees only the template This occurs within Ektron CMS400 NET and when the content is viewed on the Web site Setting the Go Live Date on Existing Content When you set a go live date for changes made to existing content and it completes the approval chain the content has a grey border within Ektron CMS400 NET until the date specified When you view content on the Web site you see the previously published version When the go live date occurs the new content replaces the previously published version and the content s status changes to Active Setting an End Date on Content To set an end date for content follow these steps 1 Access the editor by adding new content or editing an existing one 2 If adding new content enter a title and content 3 Click the calendar button next to the End Date field 4 A calendar pops up 5 Select the date and time you want the content to be removed from the Web site 6 Click the Done button 7 The date and time appear in the End Date field NOTE When you select a time for content to go live that time depends on the server s system clock If the clock is incorrect the content will not be removed at the intended time Scheduling Content to Begin and End Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 79 What Happens After I Set an End Date If you set an end date to content and it gets published to your Web site the content
233. formation into memory the original information is lost Copying from Other Applications on page 448 Paste Ctrl V Insert the most recently cut or copied text and graphics at the current cursor location Paste Text Paste the contents of the clipboard as plain text That is all HTML tags including images are not pasted This button is helpful when you want to eliminate the HTML formatting of the text being copied Replace Launches the Search and Replace dialog box The dialog searches for and lets you optionally replace text that you specify Finding and Replacing Text on page 449 Find Next Find next occurrence of the string entered into the Find What field of the Search and Replace dialog box Finding and Replacing Text on page 449 Undo Ctrl Z Reverse the most recent action as if it never occurred You can undo as many actions as you wish Redo Ctrl Y Reverse the undo action Spell Check manual Begin spell checker Checking Spelling Upon Demand on page 454 Spell Check automatic Turn on or off spell check as you type feature Checking Spelling as You Type on page 453 Button Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Function For more information see Toolbar Buttons Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 427 Edit Hyperlink Change information about a hyperlink Using Hyperlinks on page 557
234. ft panel select the folder that contains the hyperlink Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 152 6 In the right panel select Hyperlinks from the file type dropdown 7 Select the hyperlink whose name was given to you by your system administrator 8 Click the insert button Making Form Results Available to Site Users When you create polls and surveys you can choose to have the results displayed after site users submit their data These results can be displayed in the same window or output to a new window In addition you can choose how to chart the data For a description of chart types see Chart Type on page 154 To show site visitors the results follow these steps 1 Go to the page on which you determine the form s response If this is a new form it is page 4 of the Forms Wizard To modify an existing form select the form s folder then the form Next select Edit and click the Post Back Message tab Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 153 2 Select Report on the form 3 Choose whether you want the results to appear in the Same Window or a New Window Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 154 4 Choose the style of the report The following table describes the types of charts available Chart Type Description
235. ftware by any person or entity other than Company In the event of a breach of warranty Customer s sole and exclusive remedy is repair of all or any portion of the Software If such remedy fails of its essential purpose Customer s sole remedy and Ektron s maximum liability shall be a refund of the paid purchase price for the defective Products only This limited warranty is only valid if Ektron receives written notice of breach of warranty within thirty days after the warranty period expires 5 Limitation of Warranties and Liability THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE SOLD AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY WARRANTIES AS TO THE PERFORMANCE MERCHANTIBILITY DESIGN OR OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE NO WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IS OFFERED EXCEPT AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 4 ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS AND IMPLIED ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED NEITHER COMPANY NOR ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF BUSINESS OR GOODWILL LOSS OF DATA OR USE OF DATA INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS NOR FOR ANY OTHER INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND UNDER OR ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT HOWEVER CAUSED WHETHER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY BREACH OR REPUDIATION OF CONTRACT TORT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE EVEN IF COMPANY OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS 6 Miscellaneous This License Agreement the License granted hereunder and the Software may not be assigned
236. g Tasks By Column On every View Tasks page you can sort the information by most columns Information can be sorted by the following Column Click to sort tasks Title Alphabetically by title of associated content CID By content ID number State By task state from first to last Priority By task priority High appears first followed by Normal then Low Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 400 emailing Tasks You can email the contents of any Task screen emailing tasks works the same as emailing reports See emailing Reports on page 124 Editing a Task You can change task information such as Title Assigned to Language Content Priority Task Category Task Type Due Date By due date beginning with dates closest to today Assigned To Alphabetically by user to whom the task is assigned Note Once set a task s assigned to user does not change throughout the life of the task Assigned By Alphabetically by user who assigned the task Last Added Comment Alphabetically by the most recently created task comment Create Date By date task was created beginning with dates closest to today Column Click to sort tasks Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 401 Status State Due Date Start Date Description To edit a task p
237. ge 299 You can also add a new collection See Creating a Collection on page 301 Viewing a Collection To view a collection follow these steps 1 Select a collection using the procedure described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 297 or Finding a Collection Using the Collections Folder on page 298 2 The View Collection screen appears Description Description given to collection by user who created or last edited it Path Folder location of the collection Column Title Description Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 300 Learn How to See More Information About a Collection The screen displays each item in the collection To learn more about a collection click More Info When you do the lower section of the screen displays the following information about the collection title description ID number Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 301 template last user who edited it last date when it was edited date it was created whether or not the content folder s subfolders can be included for each content item in the collection a link to the content click this to view and edit the content ID number quicklink Collections Toolbar The following table describes the collect
238. h if you are certain the content is within a folder or its subfolders NOTE The Advanced Search Options let you include or exclude a folder s subfolders from the search See Also Advanced Search Options on page 245 Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 245 Use the Look In dropdown to select a folder to search illustrated below The drop down box lists all folders that you opened since you signed on If the folder you want is not in the list click Browse and a complete CMS folder display appears Select a folder from that display Advanced Search Options Advanced search options let you search just the current folder or that folder plus all of its subfolders include words that partially match the search string for example if you enter the word the the search returns content that includes theater find content that includes all words you enter any of the words or just the exact phrase The options are explained in Specifying Match Criteria on page 59 Performing Actions on Content You can perform a wide range of actions on Ektron CMS400 NET content within Ektron Explorer For example you can edit content change its title move it to another folder etc This section explains the actions you can perform To see a list of available actions move the cursor to the right frame and right click the mouse Using Ektron Explorer Ektron
239. hat indicate the beginning of the menu 2 Click the mouse 3 Hold down the mouse button and drag the menu to the new location You can move the menu anywhere on the screen 4 After you place the menu where you want it release the mouse button Changing the Menu s Orientation To change the menu s orientation follow these steps 1 Drag the menu from the toolbar 2 Move the cursor to the bottom of the menu until it becomes a double headed arrow illustrated below Customizing Your Toolbar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 443 3 Drag the cursor to the lower left As you do the menu s orientation changes from horizontal to vertical illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 444 The Context Sensitive Menu This section explains the functions available on the menu that appears when you right click the mouse within the eWebEditPro XML editor You can also access this menu by pressing the application key Because this menu can change depending on what you are doing it is called a context sensitive menu NOTE A different context sensitive menu is available when your cursor is within a table That menu is described in The Table Context Sensitive Menu on page 518 The following table lists the menu options and where to get more information on each The Context Sensitive Menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual
240. he Content History Window on page 113 Restoring a Previous Version on page 114 Comparing Historical Versions on page 115 Removing Applied XSLT on page 115 Accessing Content History By default all users can view the history of Ektron CMS400 NET content You can access content history from two places The Workarea s View Content page Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 112 The icon menu for content on a Web page Once you access the history the functionality is identical The following sections explains how to access the content history from both places Accessing the Content History from the Workarea To access the history from the Workarea follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View Content page for the content whose history you want to view 2 Click the View History button Accessing the Content History from a Web page To access the history for content from a Web page follow these steps 1 Sign in 2 Browse to the content whose history you want to view 3 Click the View History button 4 The Content History window opens Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 113 The Content History Window The View Content History window lists every version of the content available in Ektron CMS400 NET T
241. he Edit option 5 The View Menu screen for the menu appears 6 Click the Edit button 7 The Edit Menu screen is displayed 8 As necessary update the fields by referencing Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 321 9 Click the Save button Editing a Menu Item You can edit a menu item via its content folder menus module navigation link on a Web page See Also Working with Menus on page 316 Editing a Menu Item via its Content Folder To edit a menu item from its content folder follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 345 2 Click the menu you want to edit Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 336 3 The View Menu screen for that menu appears listing all menu items Icons on the View Menus Screen The following icons indicate the type of each menu item and the options you can perform on them Icon Menu item type Available actions For more information see Submenu Add submenu item Adding an Item to a Submenu on page 331 Reorder submenu items Reordering Menu Items on page 348 Edit submenu Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 321 Delete submenu Deleting a Submenu on page 350 Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revi
242. he Ektron CMS400 NET view of your Web site You do not exit Ektron CMS400 NET Installing the Document Management Functionality If the version of Ektron CMS400 NET that you are using includes the optional Document Management functionality the first time you The Workarea and Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 18 access the Workarea the following screen appears It prompts you to install the Document Management software onto your computer Follow these steps to install the Document Management software 1 Read the screen 2 At the bottom of the screen click Install Now 3 The following screen appears The line at the top of the screen circled in red may appear depending on your browser security The Workarea and Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 19 4 If that text appears click it The following menu appears 5 Click Install ActiveX Control 6 The following screen appears Click Install The Workarea and Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 20 7 The following screen appears Close it when you see Ektron Asset Control in the top left corner of the screen circled in red below The Workarea and Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 21 Understanding the Smart Desktop The Smart Desktop is one of Ektron CMS40
243. he Library and Inserting it into Content Use this procedure to insert an image into content that has not yet been copied to the library This procedure inserts the item into the library then into the content 1 Invoke the editor by adding or editing content in Ektron CMS400 NET 2 Click the library button 3 The library opens 4 Navigate to the folder that will contain the file after you insert it 5 From the File types dropdown select the type of file you want to insert Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 227 6 Click the Add Library button 7 A new screen appears Browse to the file you want to insert Or you can click the search button to search for a file to insert 8 Enter a Description for the file 9 If metadata is required for the library item you must complete it Metadata fields may appear in the lower section of the screen 10 Click the Add Library button 11 The file is inserted into the selected library folder and the content Hyperlinks For a definition of the term hyperlinks see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 208 Adding Hyperlinks You must copy hyperlinks to the library before content creators can insert them into content To copy a hyperlink to the library follow the procedure described in Copying Files to the Library on page 216 The only difference is that you insert a hyperlin
244. he Thumbnail Size You can change the size of the thumbnail images in the right frame The default size is small You can change it to medium or large NOTE You can only adjust the size of HTML or XML content If the content is an external file such as a Word document you cannot adjust its thumbnail size Note that menu options allow you to change just the selected image or all images in the right frame The new size is only used for the current viewing of the folder Once you view other folders or return to this one the default size is used To display the menu for changing the thumbnail size move the cursor to the right of the thumbnail image and right click the mouse Then select View the desired size and whether the new size applies to only the content next to the cursor or all content in the folder Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 243 Removing Ektron Explorer from Display To remove Ektron Explorer from display click the X in the top corner of the left frame see below Searching for CMS Content The Explorer s search feature lets you look for CMS content by entering some of the content s title or some of its text Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 244 Selecting a Folder to Search in You can also select a folder in which to begin to search This reduces the time needed to complete the searc
245. he content folder as illustrated below Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 395 Assigning a Task from the View Content Screen To assign a task from the View Content screen follow these steps 1 Access the View Content screen for the content to which you want to attach in a task as described in Viewing Content on page 40 2 Click the Add Task button IMPORTANT The Add Task button only appears if your system administrator has granted you permission to add tasks For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Permissions 3 Follow the directions in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 383 The only differences are the content s ID number and title appear on the screen the language of the content is the default language Viewing a Task Once a task is added with the exception of Administrators and users given permission to create tasks only the user who assigned the task and those to whom the task was assigned can view it To view a task follow these steps Viewing a Task from the Content Folder 1 Access the Contents folder from the left side of your Workarea 2 Select the content associated with the task 3 Click the Tasks tab 4 The page lists all tasks assigned to the content 5 Select a task From the view task page you can add a com
246. he following flowchart illustrates a typical sequence of events when working with content Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 46 To add content follow these steps 1 Browse to the folder where you want to create the new content 2 Select a language from the language dropdown list 3 Select a content type from the Types dropdown list Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 47 See Also Types of Content on page 5 4 Click the Add button 5 The Add Content window opens 6 Create content in the editor using the following table Responding to the Fields on the Add Content Screen After you respond to the above fields the following buttons are available Field Description Title Enter a title for the content Add to Quicklinks Table Check if you want to create a Quicklink to this content If you do users can insert links to this content from within other Ektron CMS400 NET content items See Also A quicklink is a special kind of hyperlink that jumps to another content item on your Web site A regular hyperlink jumps to a Web page on the internet on page 209 Content Searchable Check this box if the content should be found when someone searches your Web site Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2
247. he form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below Default value If you want to set a default value for this field enter it here For example if this field collects a city and most users enter New York enter New York as the value Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field The choices are No validation response is not checked Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked If you assign Cannot be blank the field is surrounded by red dashes when it appears on your Web site Error Message Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s response to this field does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is Cannot be blank the error message could be Please enter a response By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion you choose You can use this field to customize its text Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Windows s
248. he menu Field Description Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 325 2 Click the Add Menu button 3 The Add Menu screen appears 4 To complete the fields on the Add Menu screen see Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 321 With the menu added you may assign menu items to it See Adding a Menu Item on page 325 Adding a Menu Item Similar to being able to add edit view or delete a menu Ektron CMS400 NET also allows you to add edit view and delete a menu item to a menu See Also The Structure of Menus and Menu Items on page 317 Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder To add a menu item via a content folder follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content folder that contains the menu to which you want to add items 2 Click the View Menus icon 3 Click the menu that you want to add items to 4 In the View Language dropdown list select the language of the menu See Also Working with Menus in a Multi Language System on page 352 5 The Add Menu screen opens displaying a list of items that can be added to the menu The following illustration explains the icons on the screen Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 326 6 Click the Add Item button 7 Use the table below to select a type of menu item and follow the steps to add that menu item Add
249. he window displays the following information for each version version number See Also The Content Version Number on page 113 a green circle appears next to any version that was published On dates without a green circle the content was checked in but not published date and time when a version was checked in or published title of content last user who edited content comments entered by user to describe nature of changes made To view any version click its title When you do the Content History window appears for the selected content The Content Version Number Ektron CMS400 NET assigns a unique number to each saved version of a content block The number is increased by one tenth if the content is checked in but not published If the content is published the next whole number is assigned Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 114 For example if the current version is 1 0 and you check in that content the new version is numbered 1 1 If the next user who edits that content publishes it the new version number is 2 0 If the content is purged the numbering scheme restarts with the content that remains in the database The Detail History Window After viewing the View Content History window you can click any version to see the detail for it The detailed History window has two sides The left side redi
250. hen the content will be removed from the Web site Action on End Date What happens to the content when its end date and time are reached See Also Setting Archive Options on page 79 Date Created When the content was created Approval Method Whether all approvers must sign off on content before it is published managed by your system administrator Approvals The users in the approval chain for this content See Also Approving Declining Content on page 94 XML Configuration The XML Configuration applied to the content This is typically managed by your system administrator Path The folder path to the content s folder A slash represents the Content folder Content Searchable Yes appears if the content will be found when someone searches your Web site Field Description Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 45 content portion of the Workarea by clicking the up arrow The arrow s screen location is shown below Once the content area is expanded the top row of buttons and title are not visible Click the down arrow to return the content area to normal size The top row of buttons and title also return to the screen Adding Content If you have permission to add content to a folder you can create content for that folder After you create the content your system administrator must insert in onto a page on your Web site T
251. hing When the content is published it will no longer be archived Adding a Content Summary Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 82 Adding a Content Summary A summary provides a short description of content to supplement the title when displaying a list of content on a Web page When you create or edit content you can create a summary Then your Web site developer can create Web pages that contain just the summaries to attract readers to the full story A good example is a news Web site A page on that site could list the titles of the top stories followed by a summary of each illustrated below Like content summaries can include images and files as well as different font styles and sizes This chapter explains how to create summaries and how they can help navigation within your site Your system administrator determines how to display the summaries on your site TOP STORIES Ektron Named a Rising Star 08 15 2003 August 15 2003 Amherst New Hampshire USA Ektron Inc an innovator in Web content management and authoring has been named a Rising Star as part of the prestigious New England Technology Fast 50 Program Ektron Launches International Distribution Program 08 08 2003 August 8 2003 Amherst New Hampshire USA Ektron Inc an innovator in dynamic Web content authoring and management with over 350 000 users today announced the launch of its international distribution
252. ht click the mouse 3 A menu appears 4 Click Remove from Favorites Adding a Folder to the Favorites Folder You can add any folder to the Favorites folder To do so follow these steps 1 Select a folder A selected folder has a blue background and white foreground 2 Right click the mouse 3 A menu appears 4 Click Add to Favorites Viewing a Folder in the Favorites Folder To work with content in a Favorites folder click the folder When you do its content appears in right frame like other folders NOTE Folders in the favorites folder have fewer menu options Removing a Folder from the Favorites Folder To remove any folder from the Favorites folder follow these steps 1 Select the folder 2 Right click the mouse 3 A menu appears 4 Click Remove from Favorites Recently Viewed Content The Recently Viewed Content option displays a predetermined number of the most recently accessed content items By default you see 10 To change the number follow these steps Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 259 1 Place the cursor in the left frame 2 Right click the mouse 3 A menu appears 4 Click Options 5 The Options dialog appears Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 260 6 Edit the number in the Size of Recently Viewed Folder per CMS field
253. hyperlink to another Web page This procedure is described in Using Hyperlinks on page 557 a bookmark within another Web page This procedure is described in Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page on page 560 Creating a Bookmark When creating a bookmark you must specify a source the text or image that the user clicks to move to the bookmark bookmark the place to which the cursor jumps when the user clicks the source To continue with the above example a meeting date is the source and the meeting minutes are the bookmark To create a bookmark follow these steps Using Bookmarks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 554 1 Select the bookmark text or image 2 Click the Bookmark button 3 The Bookmark dialog box appears Enter the name of the bookmark The bookmark can include the following non alphabetic characters amp _ 4 Click Add 5 The editor screen returns The bookmark does not appear on the page Select the source text or image 6 Click the Hyperlink button 7 The Hyperlink dialog box appears 8 Click the down arrow to the right of the Quicklink field and click the bookmark you created in Step 3 Using Bookmarks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 555 9 If desired you can use the Target Frame field to change the wi
254. ication In general copying from another application involves these steps 1 Sign on to the application in which the information resides 2 Select the information to be copied 3 Press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt 4 Go to eWebEditPro XML 5 Press lt Ctrl gt lt V gt to paste the selected information Note that you can only copy content not background information that generates content So for example you can copy the values in a spreadsheet but not the formulas used to generate those values Also copying dynamic fields from Microsoft WORD would retrieve the current value of the fields but not the variables that generate those values It s a good idea to experiment with copying from different sources to test the results Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 449 Finding and Replacing Text To find and optionally replace text on your Web page click the Replace button When you do the Find and Replace dialog box appears You can use this dialog box to simply find text or to find text and replace it with other text Each option is explained below NOTE You can also use this dialog to delete text that appears repeatedly To do so follow the directions in Finding and Replacing Text on page 450 and enter nothing in the Replace With field See Also Finding Text on page 449 Finding and Replacing Text on page 450 Additional Optio
255. ich resembles Windows Explorer and lets you find content by navigating through a folder tree See Also The Workarea and Smart Desktop on page 16 Use the Search button which appears on many screens When clicked a screen prompts you to enter keywords and then finds content containing the keywords The Editing Process After you find content click the Edit button to open it in an editor Below is an example of content within the editor Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 8 The editor resembles popular word processing software You can enter text then select it and click a button to change its display properties For example you can make text bold change the color or copy and paste it You can also insert images tables links to other Web pages and check spelling The Lifecycle of Content After you edit content you typically submit it for approval to one or more individuals who oversee changes to your Web site These people can review edit and approve the change When the last approver signs off the new content becomes available on the Web site In some cases you are one of the content approvers In this case you receive an email notifying you that content needs approval You look it over change it as needed then pass it on to the next approver If you do not agree with the changes you can decline the request In this case the us
256. ick the folder with the up arrow NOTE If you select content from a subfolder click the add button to add the selected content to the collection Navigating between subfolders deselects content 9 Click the Add button See Also Creating a Collection on page 301 Working with Collections on page 295 Creating New Content for a Collection Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 308 You can create new content while adding content links to a collection To add content follow these steps 1 Access the View Collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 297 2 Access the View Collection Screen for a collection as described in Viewing a Collection on page 299 3 If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language support select the language of the collection 4 Click the Add button 5 The Add Items to Collection screen appears 6 If your collection includes subfolders and you want to add the content to one of them navigate to that subfolder Otherwise proceed to the next step 7 Click the Add Content button 8 The Add Content screen appears If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language support the content s language appears next to the title The language is derived from the
257. iew content that has not yet been published Click View Published button to view content that is live on the Web site View History View and possibly restore older versions of a content block Content History on page 55 View Difference Compare two versions of content Comparing Versions of Content on page 104 Edit Form Properties Edit Form properties not available via the Edit Content button Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 193 Delete Form Delete a form Deleting a Form on page 200 Check Links Check for other content that contains a link to this form Link Checking on page 56 Add Task Add a task Managing Tasks on page 368 View Task View task information Add Form Add a new form Creating a New Form on page 147 Export Report Download form data to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet Exporting Form Reports on page 191 View Reports View submitted form data can select range of dates Viewing Form Reports on page 187 Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 202 Creating Polls and Surveys Polls and surveys are a type of form All of the same functionality is available and applies WARNING For complete understanding of Forms Polls and Surveys you should read the entire Working with HTML Forms chapter Polls are generally one question and appear on a site for a very sho
258. iff 108 Ignore Case field eWebDiff 108 Ignore Format Attributes field eWebDiff 108 image extensions library setting 212 image info WebImageFX command 493 image upload from Microsoft Word document 459 inserting picture from computer 466 media file selection 463 images adding space around 473 aligning 471 background cell inserting 541 table inserting 530 border color 471 thickness 470 deleting 476 deleting from server 465 editing 477 inserting 461 from server into editor 464 inserting from your computer 466 library adding to content 229 editing titles 228 overwriting 228 uploading 228 viewing 228 locking in position 431 moving to server 475 scanning 506 specifying color depth 508 indent toolbar option 430 insert column toolbar button 433 library item toolbar button 35 new cell toolbar button 433 row toolbar button 433 table toolbar button 513 inserting cells 536 HTML 564 instant email see email instant Internet addresses spell checking 456 italic toolbar option 430 J jumps see bookmarks and hyperlinks justify toolbar option 430 L landing page after login customizing for user 410 language user editing 409 library accessing 209 add items button 34 asset adding as menu item 329 copying files to 215 definition 208 file extensions 212 files editing 220 inserting into content 224 overwriting 220 viewing 218 folder properties 211 forms adding to content 229
259. ight frame while its subfolders appear below it The right frame shows content in the currently selected folder Above the right frame is a toolbar of buttons that represent tasks you can perform on selected content The lower left frame shows Ektron CMS400 NET s top level folders Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 33 In this chapter you learn about adding editing publishing and deleting content through the following subtopics Permissions and Approvals are explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual Workarea Toolbar Buttons on page 34 Viewing a Folder on page 37 Viewing Content on page 40 Expanding the Content Area on page 44 Adding Content on page 45 Editing Content on page 49 Adding Content on page 45 Searching the Workarea on page 55 Adding Subfolders on page 72 Deleting Folders on page 74 Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 34 Workarea Toolbar Buttons The top of many Workarea screens feature a toolbar that contains buttons for performing actions This section explains the buttons functions Button Name Description Add Adds items in several places Add Calendar Event Accesses the add calendar event screen in the Workarea
260. in Submit for publication Checked out Check in Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 124 Then click the button at the top left to perform the action on the selected content items Viewing Editing Content on the Report To view and possibly edit any content on a report click it It appears on the View Content screen illustrated below The View Content screen provides several toolbar options that you can perform on the content These options are explained in After you select the content you have the following options on page 41 emailing Reports You can email any report You might do this for example to notify a user that several content items are checked out to him All information in the report appears in the email A sample appears below Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 125 You can click any content item on the report and proceed to that page of your Web site To email any report follow these steps 1 Display the report that you want to email 2 Click the email button 3 A list of all users and user groups in your Ektron CMS400 NET appears NOTE Users appear fIrst in alphabetical order by username followed by user groups The icon for user groups has two heads see below Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revisi
261. in and End on page 75 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual chapter Web Alert Feature 11 Check in or submit the content for publishing as you would a content block See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 269 and Adding Content on page 45 Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 279 Importing Several Open Office Documents Your computer or network may have several Open Office files that you want the Document Management functionality to manage Follow these steps to import several Open Office files at once See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 274 and The Work Offline Option on page 275 NOTE In addition to the procedure described below you can also drag and drop Open Office files into Ektron CMS400 NET See Importing Files via Drag and Drop on page 288 1 Place all files to be imported in the same folder on your computer or network 2 Select the CMS folder in which you want to place the documents being imported 3 The default language appears in the View dropdown list To save the Open Office file under a different language click the dropdown list and select the language 4 On the View Contents of Folder screen click the down arrow next to the add dropdown list to view a list of items you can add 5 Select Office Documents 6 Click the Add Several Files but
262. in the table header to select or deselect all 5 In the To text field enter the name of the template you want to apply to the selected quicklinks 6 Click the Update Quicklinks button to update the changes A confirmation message is displayed 7 Click OK to continue The selected quicklinks are updated to use the specified template Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 232 Using Ektron Explorer The Ektron Explorer lets you navigate through and view CMS content without signing in and using the Workarea You can also use a search screen to find and view CMS content So even if you have no knowledge of Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron Explorer provides a simple recognizable way to find and view content Depending on how your system administrator has set up the Explorer you may also have the ability to edit add and delete content The following is an example of the Ektron Explorer The left frame lets you navigate through Ektron CMS400 NET s folders The right frame shows the content in a selected folder Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 233 A second tab in the left frame lets you search for content When you do the right frame displays search results Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 234 For more information see Searching for CMS Con
263. ing a Menu Item via Menus Module Assign this type of content to the menu For details see Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 328 Any library asset images files Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Item on page 329 External hyperlink Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 330 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 331 Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 327 To add a menu item via the menus module follow these steps 1 From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus 2 Click the menu that you want to add a menu item to 3 In the View Language dropdown list select the language of the menu 4 Click the Add Item button 5 The Add Menu screen displays a list of items that you can add to the menu Use to the table below to select the type of menu item and follow the steps to add it Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page 1 Access the Web page that contains the link to display the menu 2 Place the mouse on the hyperlink that causes the menu to appear 3 The menu appears Menu item type For more information see Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 328 Any library assets images files Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Item on page 329
264. ing a Previous Version 114 Comparing Historical Versions 115 Removing Applied XSLT 115 Content Workflow Reports 117 Accessing the Reports Folder 117 Common Report Topics 119 Approvals Reports 127 Checked In Report 129 Checked Out Report 130 New Content Report 130 Submitted Report 131 Content Pending Start Date Report 132 Refresh Reminder Report 133 Expired Content Report 134 Content to Expire Report 135 Site Update Activity Report 136 Search Phrase Report 141 Working with HTML Forms
265. ing any combination of these criteria language the language of the search page either Workarea or site search The user performing the search can choose a language before inserting the search text If he does not explicitly choose a language the search uses the default one This report can show results from all languages or any one that you select a minimum number of occurrences of the word or phrase to return For example you only want words or phrases entered into the Search Text field at least 10 times during the last month whether to include words or phrases entered into the site search the search page that site visitors use Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 143 whether to include words or phrases entered into the Workarea search accessed from the View Contents of Folder screen this search page is used by authorized CMS users to find content date range Display of Search Results The search results show the number of times each word or phrase that satisfies the selection criteria appears They are arranged in this order words or phrases with the most occurrences appear first if several words or phrases have the same number of occurrences they are arranged alphabetically Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 144 Working with HTML Forms WARNING The functionality described in th
266. ing with Table Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 551 Setting Cell Padding and Spacing Cell padding is the space between a cell s data and its border Cell spacing is the space between a cell and surrounding cells Assigning Cell Padding To assign cell padding to your table click the Cell Padding field on the Insert Table dialog box Enter the number of pixels Working with Table Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 552 Assigning Cell Spacing To assign cell spacing to your table click the Cell Spacing field on the Insert Table dialog box Enter the number of pixels Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 553 Using Bookmarks Use a bookmark to let a user jump from any word phrase or image to another place in a file On your Web page text appears in a different color to indicate that additional information is available at the bookmark s location For example if your Web page includes meeting minutes the top of the page could list the meeting dates You could then assign a hyperlink to each date and a bookmark to each set of minutes The user sees that a date is in a different color so clicks the date to jump to the bookmark that marks the location of the meeting minutes Creating a Bookmark on page 553 describes how to set up a hyperlink to a bookmark within a file You can also set up
267. internet NOTE If you want to create jumps within a file see Using Bookmarks on page 553 For example if your Web page includes a jump to the Ektron Web site you would enter the text to indicate the jump for example Ektron Web Site then create a hyperlink to www ektron com When users see Ektron Web Site in a different color they can click the text to jump to the site Although most jumps go to the top of another Web page you can also jump to a bookmark within a Web page This section explains Creating a Hyperlink on page 557 Testing a Hyperlink on page 560 Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page on page 560 Editing a Hyperlink on page 561 Removing a Hyperlink on page 562 Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink on page 562 Creating a Hyperlink When creating a hyperlink you must specify a source the text or image the user clicks to move to the destination destination the Web page to which the display moves when the user clicks the source Using Hyperlinks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 558 To continue with the above example Ektron Web Site is the source and the Web page available at www ektron com is the destination To create a hyperlink click the Hyperlink button When you do the Hyperlink dialog box appears From there you can select from a list of
268. ion 1 105 When Can I Compare Content The View Content Difference feature is only available when you are viewing an historical version of content a staged version of the content is available See Also Staged Content on page 552 The following table explains when you can use the feature and which versions are compared If content can be compared with another version the View Difference button appears in the content history area or the Web page view The Compare Content Window NOTE The first time the View Content Difference feature is opened a simple installation program runs See Also First Use of the View Content Difference Feature on page 110 The Compare Content window consists of the following Toolbar on page 106 Content Area on page 109 View Tabs on page 109 Content Status Compares current published version with Published Historical version stored in the content history area Checked In Most recently checked in version Submitted Submitted version Pending Start Date Scheduled version pending start date Checked Out Not available Comparing Versions of Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 106 Each area is explained below Toolbar The content comparison toolbar has five buttons explained below Button Name Description Print Sends content to local or network printer Note Thi
269. ion 1 90 4 Edit the metadata Note that Required fields are red and marked with an asterisk You must place at least one response in such fields before the content can be saved Your system administrator may prevent you from editing a field In this case the field has a gray background and you cannot place the cursor there Fields may appear in two columns In this case the system administrator provides a list of terms that you can apply to the content You can only select terms from the list you cannot enter free text One column is labeled Not Included and the other Included Move terms between lists by clicking the arrow gt gt and lt lt Or move all terms between lists by clicking All gt gt You may see a semi colon as a separator character Use the separator character to separate items in a field Adding or Editing Metadata Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 91 If default metadata is defined for a specific data type you can click the Default button at the bottom of each field to restore it Below each field is a Characters Left field which counts the number of metadata characters You cannot exceed the maximum 500 characters 5 Click the Save button 6 The View Content screen reappears The content is now in a checked out state to you For the changes to take effect on the Web site check in the content and submit i
270. ion 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 214 NOTE Some search field check boxes are circles while others are squares If the box is a circle you can only choose one option If it is a square you can choose as many as you want The search then displays all library items that meet the search criteria on the search results screen Displaying Search Results Search results appear in this order images files hyperlinks quicklinks form links Result Display Options At the top of the library search screen a pull down list lets you choose the how to display the results Filename Search If you check this box the search considers the file name when returning search results Otherwise the file name is not considered by the search For example if you enter ppt into the keyword field the search returns all files that include that string such as all Powerpoint presentations Only search items last edited by myself The search only considers library assets that were last modified by you One or more of the search criteria set by your system administrator in the Metadata Definitions screen Field Description Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 215 Files This section explains how to work with library files through the following subtopics View option Description Example Mixed If the item is an image display the image in the left co
271. ion 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 341 Image Link You can have an image appear next to or instead of the menu title For example To do this follow these steps Note Before beginning these steps the image must reside in the library if it does not add it before proceeding For more information see Copying Files to the Library on page 216 1 Click the image icon 2 The library window opens 3 Navigate to the folder that contains the image you want to use 4 Click the Insert button to insert it Using Image to Replace Title Text Alternatively you can have the image replace the menu text so that only the image appears to indicate the kind of information on the menu To do this check the Use image instead of a title checkbox Field Description Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 342 5 Click the Save button URL Link After you create a menu your developer links it to text or an image on a Web page by modifying a page template As a result when a user reading that Web page moves the cursor over the text or image the menu appears In the illustration below the menu appears when the user moves the cursor over Products You can also assign a URL link to a menu using this field If you do and the user clicks the link text or image he jumps to the specified page For example in this field you assign the product landing page CMS
272. ion message is displayed 4 Click OK to delete the menu NOTE Deleting a menu automatically deletes all menu items associated with it Do not confuse the menu link with the item itself For example deleting a menu deletes its links to content but has no effect on the content Deleting a Menu via Menus Module To delete a menu via its menus module follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 347 2 Click the Delete button 3 A confirmation message is displayed 4 Click OK NOTE Deleting a menu automatically deletes all menu items associated with it Do not confuse the menu link with the item itself For example deleting a menu deletes its links to content but has no effect on the content Deleting a Submenu 1 Access the View Menu page as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 347 2 Select the submenu 3 Click the delete icon to the right of the submenu surrounded in red below Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 351 Deleting a Menu Item Similar to editing and viewing a menu you can remove a menu item from a menu via its content folder its menu folder Removing a Menu Item via its Content Folder You can delete any menu item by clicking the accompanying Delete icon on the View menu screen Alternatively you can
273. ion toolbar buttons Creating a Collection Creating a collection involves two steps Button Name Description More Information Add Add new collection or add items to a collection Creating a Collection on page 301 Remove Remove items from a collection Removing Content from the Collection on page 309 Reorder Reorder items in a collection Reordering Collections List on page 310 Edit Edit collection information Editing Collection Information on page 311 Delete Delete a collection Deleting a Collection on page 311 Back Return to previous screen Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 302 Adding a Collection on page 302 Assigning Content to the Collection on page 305 The following sections explain each step NOTE This section explains creating a collection in a site that does not support multiple languages If you want to create collections in several languages see Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 312 See Also Working with Collections on page 295 Adding a Collection To add a new collection follow these steps 1 Navigate to the folder in which you want to create the collection 2 If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language support features select the language See Also Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on
274. ions You type text and then use toolbar buttons illustrated below and menu options to change the text s appearance or perform functions on it such as spell checking To learn more about using eWebEditPro XML see these topics Creating a Simple Web Page on page 419 Toolbar Buttons on page 423 Customizing Your Toolbar on page 436 The Context Sensitive Menu on page 444 Using eWebEditPro XML s Advanced Features on page 447 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 419 Creating a Simple Web Page This section walks you through the process of creating a simple Web page using only a few of the many features available Later sections explain all of the features and how to use them Your Finished Web Page When you finish this exercise your simple Web page will look like this Notice that this page has the following elements The second sentence includes bold italic and underlined text The third sentence includes a hyperlink text that will jump to another Web page when the user clicks on it The fourth sentence begins with a bullet The last sentence has some very large 18 point text Creating a Simple Web Page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 420 Creating a Sample Web Page To create this page follow these steps Enter the First Two Sentences 1 Open eWebEditPro
275. irst cell you want to delete 2 To delete only that cell proceed to the next step To delete several contiguous cells select them Contiguous cells can cross rows 3 Right click the mouse 4 Click Delete Cells from the menu Any cells to the right of the deleted cells shift left to occupy the vacant space In this example the cursor was in cell b when the user clicked on Delete Cells Working with Table Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 538 Before After Setting a Cell s Border Color A cell border is the line that separates it from other cells By default the color of a cell s border matches the color of the table border However you can change the color of any cell border individually NOTE When viewed in Netscape Navigator cell borders are gray regardless of any change you make on the Cell Properties dialog box This example illustrates the effect of different cell border colors within a table If you want a cell s border to disappear set it to the same color as the table s background color To change the color of a cell s border follow these steps 1 Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse 2 Click Table from the menu 3 Click Cell Properties from the menu Working with Table Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 539 4 Click the Border Color field on the Cell Prope
276. is section is not supported when using an Apple Macintosh for editing content Ektron CMS400 NET provides powerful online form capabilities allowing you to create an online dialog with visitors Now anyone in your organization not just a developer or Webmaster can create and deploy Web forms to capture visitor information Support marketing strategies by getting feedback on their needs Follow up on their interest in your products and services Register people for events Form capabilities include Creating a form and its postback message Creating polls and surveys for a Web site Adding validation criteria to form fields Automatically assigning tasks for follow up activities to form submissions Reporting on form information Exporting results to Microsoft Excel A sample form appears below Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 145 This chapter explains how to perform all form actions through the following topics Overview of Form Processing on page 146 The Structure of Form Data on page 146 Creating a New Form on page 147 Creating a Form s Content on page 155 Form Validation on page 161 Form Fields on page 162 Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 184 Assigning a Task to a Form on page 184 Viewing Form Reports on
277. is visible on the Web site When content reaches its end date you have three choices for what to do with it These are explained in Setting Archive Options on page 79 If your choice means the content will not appear on the Web site Ektron recommends having another content item ready to replace it If not and a site visitor goes to the page containing the content he sees the template without the content Appearance on Content Reports After content reaches its end date it appears on the Expired Content report which helps you keep track of expired content See Also Expired Content Report on page 134 Also the Content to Expire report lists all content whose end date will occur within a number of days that you specify See Also Content to Expire Report on page 135 Setting Archive Options After setting an End Date you can specify content s archive options which determine what happens upon reaching its end date time To be eligible for any option the content must reach its end date time progress through its approval chain and be published Until those events occur the content remains visible both within its content folder and on the site The archive options illustrated below appear below the Start Date and End Date fields on the content s Schedule screen Scheduling Content to Begin and End Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 80 Each option is explained below
278. ision 1 238 7 You are prompted to select a setup type Choose Complete Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 239 8 The installation copies the needed files to the specified folder and displays a final screen Click Finish Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 240 Displaying Ektron Explorer After you install Ektron Explorer you can use it from both Windows Explorer and Internet Explorer To use it follow these steps 1 Open Windows Explorer or Internet Explorer 2 From the menu across the top of the screen select View gt Explorer Bar gt Ektron Explorer Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 241 3 The Ektron Explorer replaces Windows Explorer As you select a folder or conduct a search in the left frame the related content appears in the right frame Once Ektron Explorer is enabled a new toolbar button appears for quick access to Explorer See Also Display of Content on page 242 Removing Ektron Explorer from Display on page 243 Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 242 Display of Content The right side of the screen displays content in the selected folder The following graphic illustrates the information available on the right side Changing t
279. ist of items you can add 5 Select Office Documents 6 Click the Add Several Files button Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 273 7 The View Contents of Folder screen splits into two sections resembling Windows Explorer The left side displays the folder structure of your PC and its network drives The right side displays files in the selected folder 8 In the left frame navigate to the folder that contains the files you want import 9 In the right frame click the checkbox next to each file you want to import You can only import files in the selected folder at this time Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 274 10 In the Title field you can enter an optional title to apply to all imported documents See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 274 11 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if the content should be searchable 12 Click the Check in or Submit for Publishing button See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 269 and Adding Content on page 45 13 The selected files are imported into the Document Management functionality Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once If you import files one at a time you can assign each file a unique title Also
280. istrator can set up types of calendar events For a personal or workgroup calendar examples might be staff meetings employment interviews conference calls For an educational institution examples might be academic deadlines sporting events and tuition due dates If you assign a type to an event while creating it you can later display only events of that type This feature lets the viewer temporarily suppress unwanted events As a result the calendar display is cleaner because it only shows relevant information Adding a Recurring Event You can assign an event to occur multiple times on a calendar To do so follow these steps 1 Add a calendar event as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 369 2 Click the Recurring tab to assign the event for more than one day See an Image of the Recurring Tab Event Type Note This field only appears if your system administrator set up one or more event types for this event See Also Understanding Event Types on page 373 To apply an event type to this event click an Event Type from the right column Then click the Right Arrow to move the event type to the Selected column Repeat for each event type you want to assign to the event Field Description Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 374 3 Refer to the table below to complete to the Recurring fields 4 Finish your edits Field
281. it If granted permission by your administrator you can create new content and edit or delete existing ones Most of your work with Ektron CMS400 NET involves working with content Buttons on the Menu The following table describes each button that may appear Button Name Description More Information Approve Approve or decline a request to publish or delete content Approving Declining Content on page 94 Add Task Assign a task to a user Managing Tasks on page 381 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 5 NOTE Your administrator can set up your system to have borders always appear on a page In that case the toolbar always appears in the content you don t need to click the mouse to make it appear For information on the classic user interface see the Administrators Manual gt Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET gt Getting Started gt Recognizing Content gt Returning to the Classic User Interface Types of Content Every piece of content in Ektron CMS400 NET is one of the following types The table below summarizes all types Delete Open View Content page From it you can delete the content Viewing Content on page 40 Edit Check out content for editing Editing Content on page 49 Logout Log out of Ektron CMS400 NET view of Web site Logging Out of the Sample Site on page 14 Previ
282. it Content Screen from a Web Page To access the Edit Content screen from a Web page follow these steps 1 Sign in 2 Browse to the content you want to edit 3 Right click the mouse and select Edit edit content create or edit a summary specify metadata for the content enter or update a comment enter or update start and end dates review and update Web Alert information To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual chapter Web Alert Feature save changes check in content submit content for approval publish content to the Web site access the library 4 Make the necessary edits to the content See Also Table of Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists on page 424 Or you can choose a toolbar option or tab from the top of the Edit Content window These options are described in Buttons on the Add Content Screen on page 48 and Tabs on the Add Content Screen on page 48 Accessing the Edit Content Screen from the Workarea To access the Edit Content screen from the Workarea follow these steps 1 Access the View Content screen for the content block you want to edit as described in Viewing Content on page 40 2 Select the language whose content blocks you want to view Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 51 3 Click the Edit button 4 The editor
283. items The approval chain is a list of people or groups who must approve new or edited content before it is published to the Web site If a user group is part of an approval chain any member of the group can approve the content The administrator also determines the sequence of approvers in the chain When a new or edited content is submitted to the approval chain it is reviewed by users who may change it approve or decline it publish it to the Internet it is published when the last user approves it The chart below illustrates the approval process Approving Declining Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 95 You can approve and decline all content that has been submitted to you from the approval folder The following topics guide you through the approval or decline of this content Approve Decline One Content Item on page 95 Approve Decline Several Content Items on page 97 Example of an Approval Chain on page 98 Approve Decline One Content Item 1 Click the Smart Desktop button circled in red below 2 Click Reports 3 Click Approvals Approving Declining Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 96 4 Click the content you want to approve or decline To select all displayed content click Select All at the top of the screen 5 The content appears You can view the content
284. ithin a table You might want to do this to arrange text in columns NOTE HTML does not let you use tabs or spaces to align text in columns You must use a table to align columns You can remove the table s border so that no lines appear between the columns and rows To insert a table within a table follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell into which you want to insert a table 2 Click the Insert Table button 3 Click Insert Table from the menu 4 The Insert Table dialog box appears 5 Edit the fields in the dialog box as needed Then click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 513 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus This section explains the menu options and dialog boxes you use to manipulate tables and cells In most cases you are referred to another section that describes the feature in more detail This section explains The Insert Table Menu on page 513 The Table Properties Dialog Box on page 515 The Cell Properties Dialog Box on page 517 The Table Context Sensitive Menu on page 518 The Insert Table Menu You access the Insert Table menu by clicking on the Insert Table button while the cursor is inside a table NOTE Before you click the button make sure the table is not selected that is the table is not surrounded by small boxes When you do the following menu appears Table Dialog Boxes and
285. iting Collection Information 311 Deleting a Collection 311 Working with Collections in a Multi Language System 312 Comparison of Collections Menus and the List Summary Fea tures 314 Working with Menus 316 The Structure of Menus and Menu Items 317 Access to the Menus Feature 318 Managing Menus 319 Working with Calendars 357 Understanding Calendars 359 Accessing the View Calendar Screen 360 Viewing a Calendar 365 Tips on Viewing a Calendar 367 Adding a Calendar Event 369 Viewing a Calendar Event 375 Editing Calendar Events 376 Deleting Calendar Events 379 Managing Tasks
286. k Permissions From User Groups This area indicates your task permissions and if you inherit them from user groups to which you belong For more information seethe Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Managing Tasks section Task Permissions User Properties the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Custom User Properties See Custom User Properties in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Field Description Online Help Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 412 Online Help Online help provides access to important and useful information about using Ektron CMS400 NET Help is provided in two formats online help accessible from most screens by clicking the help button it provides information about the screen you are currently viewing Online help is in HTML format so it opens in the browser you use to surf the internet After viewing a help topic you can browse to related topics as well as access a table of contents index and search to expand your quest for information See Also Accessing Online Help on page 412 online manuals can be viewed searched and printed like a paper manual Online manuals are in a PDF format which makes it easy to navigate online and print See Also Accessing Online Manuals on page 414 Both formats provide the same information Choose the format that best suits your needs A
287. k instead of a file Viewing Hyperlinks To view a hyperlink follow the procedure described in Viewing Files on page 218 The only difference is that you view a hyperlink instead of a file Editing Hyperlinks To edit a hyperlink follow the procedure described in Editing a File on page 220 The only difference is that you edit a hyperlink title instead of a file title You can also edit the URL Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 228 Adding Hyperlinks to Your Content Once a hyperlink is added to the library users can add the hyperlink to their content To add a hyperlink to content follow the procedure described in Adding a Library File to Content on page 224 The only difference is that you add a hyperlink instead of a file Images For a definition of the term images see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 208 Uploading Images You must copy images to the library before content creators can insert them into content To copy an image to the library follow the procedure described in Copying Files to the Library on page 216 The only difference is that you add an image instead of a file Viewing Images To view an image follow the procedure described in Viewing Files on page 218 The only difference is that you view an image instead of a file Editing Image Titles To edit an image s title follow the procedure described
288. ks gt Task Categories and Types gt View Categorization Screen gt Task Type Availability 4 Enter your information 5 Click Save 6 Your new Task Category and Task Type appear in the drop down boxes Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 391 Task Type Availability Task types can be hidden from users by clicking the Not Available check box in the Add Task Type and Edit Task Type screens By making Task Types not available you can make the Task Type unavailable without deleting it Editing a Task Type From the Add Task screen you can edit a Task Type This will allow you to change the Task Type name Task Type description and Task Type availability To edit a task type follow these steps 1 Go to the Add Task screen as described in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 383 2 Choose a Task Category and the Task Type to edit 3 Click Edit next to the Task Type dropdown box Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 392 4 The Edit Task Type screen appears Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 393 From this screen you can edit the following Task Type Task Type Description Task Type Availability See Also Task Type Availability on page 391 NOTE As a user if you set the Task type to Not Av
289. l Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 193 The View Form screen also contains several buttons to perform actions To learn about the buttons see View Form Toolbar on page 200 Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties To see and update additional form information that does not appear on the View Form screen view its properties To do so follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View Form screen of the form whose properties you want to view as described in Viewing a Form s Information on page 192 Form Submissions Shows the amount of times a user can submit the form This is often used with polls and surveys to limit the influence any one user has a given poll or survey Assign Task to Users and groups to whom a task will be automatically assigned whenever a site visitor completes the form See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 184 Content Properties Displays the properties of the form s content Content Title Title of content associated with form Note The content name is the same as the Form name Content ID Content ID number assigned to content Status The status of the content Last Editor Last user to edit the content Start Date Date and time when the content will go live on the Web site if set for a future date End Date Date and time when the content will be removed from the Web site if set for a future date Date Created Date and time when content was created Field De
290. l gt Managing Tasks gt Automatic Creation of Tasks Associated with Content Blocks gt Assigning a Preapproval Group to a Folder gt Preapproval Groups Report Report Displays content in this status For more information see Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 120 Performing an Action on Several Content Items on page 123 Viewing Editing Content on the Report on page 124 emailing Reports on page 124 Information on the Reports Each report displays the following information about its content Report Toolbar Options Field Description Title Title of content ID Internal number assigned to content by Ektron CMS400 NET Date Modified If a Start Date was assigned to the content it appears here Last Editor The user who last edited the content Path Folder location of content Toolbar Button Description For more information see email this report to selected users emailing Reports on page 124 Select a folder whose content appears on the report Content in other folders is ignored Selecting Content by Folder on page 121 Go to previous screen Select the language of the content you want to see on the report Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 121 Selecting Content by Folder After viewing a report you
291. le follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View File screen for the file you want to overwrite as described in Viewing Files on page 218 2 Click the Overwrite button 3 The Overwrite File screen appears Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 222 4 Click the Browse button 5 A window lets you navigate to the new file 6 Click the file then click the Open button 7 You return to the Overwrite File screen with the path to the new file in the Filename field 8 If desired enter a Description for the new file 9 To preview the file before you copy it click Preview file name The file is previewed in a separate window Click the X button in the top right corner of the screen to close it and return to the Workarea Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 223 10 To overwrite the current version of the file with this version click the Update button 11 The following message appears 12 To overwrite the file click OK Library Link Searching Link searching indicates all content that includes a library link It is useful when you want to delete a library item With the click of a button you see all content that you need to update to reflect the change you are making Performing a Library Item Link Search To perform a library item link search follow these steps 1 Access the View Li
292. le as a reference 7 Click the Get Result button to display the report Display Formats The submitted form data can be viewed in any of these formats Table with Totals on page 188 Summary of Selected Choices on page 188 Table of Values on page 189 List of Submitted Values on page 190 Field Description Start Date If desired specify a start date The report displays only forms that were submitted on or after the start date End Date If desired specify an end date The report displays only forms that were submitted on or before the end date Report Display Choose to display the report horizontally or vertically Data Type Specify the data type to filter the report by Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 188 Table with Totals The table of values shows the following information for each completed form a checkbox that lets you delete the response an internal identification number of the response the name of the user who submitted the form if he signed in to Ektron CMS400 NET beforehand If the user did not sign in anonymous appears date response was submitted The name of each field on the survey under each field name is the submitted response for the each user the bottom line sums the numerical and percentage totals for each response Sample of Table with To
293. lick lt Add This action places the button at the bottom of the list To remove a button from the toolbar drag it from the left side of the screen to the right You can also click a button then click Remove gt The Move Up and Move Down buttons let you to move any button up or down one slot within the list of buttons Rearranging the Items on a Menu 1 Click the button you want to move Customizing Your Toolbar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 440 2 Click Move Up and Move Down to move the button up or down one slot for each click Restoring Toolbars If you remove all toolbars from your menu and then want to restore the menus but do not have the Customize menu option follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the editor 2 Right click the mouse 3 A menu appears with a Redisplay toolbars option 4 Click this option to restore all menus Rearranging the Menus on a Toolbar To move a menu to a different toolbar location follow these steps 1 Place the cursor on the double vertical bars that indicate the beginning of the menu 2 Click the mouse 3 Hold down the mouse button and drag the menu to the new location You can move the menu anywhere else on the toolbar Note that your Webmaster can define a menu so that it cannot reside on the same row with another menu If you move such a menu it will not remain on a row with another menu Instead it
294. lignment The alignment of data up and down within a cell Setting Vertical Alignment on page 547 Background Color The cell s background color if you want it to be different from the table s background color Specifying a Cell s Background Color on page 539 Background Image A background image for the cell Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 541 Use Default Color Apply the table border color to this cell border Border Color Apply a color other than the table border color to this cell border Setting a Cell s Border Color on page 538 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 519 All items on this menu are described in The Context Sensitive Menu on page 444 except Tables which is described in The Insert Table Menu on page 513 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 520 Manipulating Your Table s Format This section explains how to manipulate your table s format by specifying a number of rows and columns a width horizontal alignment a background color or image border color and size NOTE You can also apply most of these properties to individual cells within a table See Working with Table Cells on page 487 for details Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns on page 520 Specifying Table Width on p
295. lumn If not display its title To the right display the item s Description Note Mixed search results require the Internet Explorer browser version 6 or greater Text Display item s title in the left column To the right display the file type and folder name Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 216 Copying Files to the Library on page 216 Viewing Files on page 218 Editing a File on page 220 Overwriting Files on page 220 Library Link Searching on page 223 Adding a Library File to Content on page 224 For a definition of the term files see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 208 Copying Files to the Library Files must be copied to the Ektron CMS400 NET library before users can insert them into content To copy a file to the library follow these steps 1 In the Workarea browse the library folder and select a folder to which you want to copy a file NOTE When you copy a file to a folder only users with permissions to that folder can insert the file into content 2 A list of files in that folder appears 3 Click the Add Library button 4 The Add File screen appears Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 217 5 Enter the necessary information according to the following table Below is a description
296. lumns but some of the data is moved down Manipulating Your Table s Format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 524 Setting Table Width by Percentage To specify table width by percentage choose Percent in the layout section of the Insert Table dialog box Then specify the percentage at the Width field Manipulating Your Table s Format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 525 Specifying Table Width by Pixels Specify table width by pixels if you want the table to remain the same size if a user resizes the browser For example if you specify that a table is 610 pixels wide and the user s browser is set to low resolution 640 x 480 pixels the table occupies the full width of the browser when it is maximized If the user resizes the browser so that it only occupies the left half of the screen only the left half of the table appears A scroll bar appears at the bottom of the browser The user must move the scroll bar to see the rest of the table If you set table width by pixels do not set it to more than 610 pixels Otherwise the table will not fully display on a monitor set to low resolution 640 x 480 Manipulating Your Table s Format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 526 Setting Table Width by Pixels To specify table width by pixels choose Pixels in the layout section of the Insert Table dialog box Then
297. mart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 29 To turn off autohide move the cursor to the left frame and click the push pin icon When you do the push pin returns to its original position Sending Instant Email Ektron CMS400 NET lets you send email instantly to a user or user group from many screens available from the Smart Desktop Your ability to send instant mail is indicated by a small mail icon next to a user or group name indicated in red below When you click a user group name or email icon the email screen appears as shown below Once you complete the screen and click Send an email is sent to designated users The Workarea and Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 30 Conditions for Instant eMail You must have a valid email address set up in the user profile If not email icons do not appear in Ektron CMS400 NET See Also Updating Your User Profile on page 407 Your system administrator must enable the feature Where Instant email is Available Instant email is available from several screens that display users and user groups Typically you click a user name or the email icon to launch an email Screens in the following Ektron CMS400 NET features support instant email The Workarea and Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 31 Smart Desktop Tasks
298. mary Display title of all content in a folder and possibly subfolders X Display title of selected content in a folder and possibly subfolders X X Display external hyperlinks amp library assets X Display content summary optional X X Display additional content information comment last modified date start date end date user who last edited it ID number path relative to your site s root X Can be multi leveled that is you can have submenus X Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 315 Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 316 Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET s Menu feature lets users create and maintain a dropdown menu system for your Web site The menu options can link to content library assets external hyperlinks and submenus Below is a sample menu In this example delivered with Ektron CMS400 NET the menu appears when the person viewing the Web page moves the cursor over Products The above display illustrates the menu s appearance to a visitor to your site However if a content contributor with permission to edit menus signs in to Ektron CMS400 NET then views the menu it has additional options for editing the menu or adding content NOTE For more information on adding content see Adding Content on page 45 This chapter
299. ment to the task See Adding Comments to Tasks on page 401 for more information Viewing a Task from the Tasks Folder To view a task from the Tasks folder follow these steps Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 396 1 From the Smart Desktop select the Tasks folder 2 Click the task you want to view 3 The View Task screen is displayed From here you can perform these tasks Editing a Task on page 400 Deleting a Task on page 404 Adding Comments to Tasks on page 401 See Also Task View Options on page 396 Sorting Tasks By Task Type on page 399 Sorting Tasks By Column on page 399 Managing Tasks on page 381 emailing Tasks on page 400 Task View Options Beneath the main task module folder several view screens display all tasks filtered by specified categories After viewing tasks in any category most screens let you perform an action on the tasks the actions are included in the table below For example you can change a tasks state to another state To select all tasks on a screen click the check box in the header row illustrated below Folder Displays these tasks Action you can perform from view screen Tasks All tasks assigned to you that are in one of the following states not started active awaiting data on hold reopened pending Click on task
300. more information see Setting a Border on page 470 Inserting Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 470 WARNING If you substantially adjust the picture s height and or width the picture may be distorted when users view your Web page Pixels A pixel is a single point in a graphic image Computer monitors display pictures by dividing the screen into thousands of pixels arranged in rows and columns The pixels are so close together that they appear connected Below is an image shown at regular size and then enlarged so you can see the pixels that make up the picture regular size enlarged to show pixels Setting a Border To add a border around a picture enter the border s thickness in pixels in the Border Thickness field on the Picture Properties Adjust the alignment of the picture Alignment For more information see Aligning the Picture on page 471 To make this change Use this field Inserting Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 471 dialog box Here is a picture with a 1 pixel border Here is the same picture with a 10 pixel border If the picture is not a hyperlink its border is black If the picture is also a hyperlink the border is the same color as a hyperlink for example blue or purple if visited Aligning the Picture To align a picture use the Alignment field on the Picture Properties dialog box
301. ms Used in this Chapter on page 208 Adding a Quicklink or Form to Content After new content is created if the Add to Quicklinks table checkbox was checked for it users can insert a quicklink to it into any other content To do so follow the procedure described in Adding a Library File to Content on page 224 The only difference is that you add a quicklink or form instead of a file Be sure to place the cursor where you want the quicklink or form to appear before inserting it When the quicklink or form is inserted the title of the jumped to content appears in the content To test the quicklink or form select the newly inserted title and double click it When the page is published a reader can click the link to jump to the quicklink or form page Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 230 Viewing Quicklinks or Forms To view a quicklink or form follow the procedure described in Viewing Files on page 218 The only difference is that you view a quicklink or form instead of a file The table below describes each field on the quicklinks display To preview a quicklink or form click the link at the bottom of the page Updating Default Template for Multiple Quicklinks WARNING This procedure is only necessary if Link Management is set to false in your web config file If if Link Management is set to true Ektron CMS400 NET automatically updates the template
302. n For More Information see Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 249 This information is especially useful to a system administrator Editing Content Using Ektron Explorer You can edit content from within Ektron Explorer if you have permission to do so and the content is in one of the following statuses published checked in checked out by you submitted for your approval To edit content follow these steps 1 Browse to or use the search to locate the content 2 Move the cursor next to the content title 3 Right click the mouse 4 Select Edit Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 250 5 Edit the content as you would from within Ektron CMS400 NET See Also Editing Content on page 49 Using the Ektron Explorer to email Content The Ektron Explorer lets you send a link to Ektron CMS400 NET content via email You might do this to show the content to someone who does not have access the Ektron CMS400 NET server The email contains a quicklink to the content see example below When the recipient gets the email he can click the quicklink to view the content within a browser Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 251 NOTE The recipient must have access privileges the folder that contains the content 192 168 0
303. n 1 491 Aspect ratio is the ratio of an image s width to height For example if a graphic has an aspect ratio of 2 1 its width is twice as large as its height If you check the Maintain Aspect Ratio box just specify a new width the height is calculated automatically Dialog Box Exit Standard Toolbar Button Description Save the change in the WebImageFX and return to eWebEditPro XML where the updated image appears Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 492 Exit without Save Standard Toolbar Button Description Ignore changes made to the image in WebImageFX Return to eWebEditPro XML Freehand Standard Toolbar Button Description Lets you draw a line in any shape that you want similar to using a pen on paper To use this command click the freehand command drag the line and release the mouse To change the line s size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 493 Horizontal Flip Standard Toolbar Button Description Reverses an image horizontally left to right Click this command again to reverse the image horizontally right to left Image before horizontal flip Image after horizontal flip Image Info Standard Toolbar Button Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Man
304. n CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 59 You can open a noise file with a simple word processor program such as Notepad to view any language s noise words You can also edit the file For example you can remove words that users should be able to search on Specifying Match Criteria NOTE This field is only applicable if you entered one or more words in the Search Text field From this dropdown list select criteria for how the search word or words must appear within the content of the files being searched Your choices are described below Match Criteria Examples The examples below assume you entered these words into the Search Text field partners Choice A search returns content that has For more information see All Words all words in the search field All Words on page 60 Any Word any word in the search field Any Word on page 60 Exact Phrase all words in the order specified in the search field Exact Phrase on page 60 Contains match partial words any part of any word in the search field Contains Match Partial Words on page 60 Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 60 content Monday employee green All Words All Words works like an and function The search returns only content that has the words partners and content and Monday and employee and gr
305. n of content appears If the content has never been published nothing appears 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 297 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 299 3 Click the collection to which you want to assign content Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 306 4 The View Collection screen appears 5 Accept or change the language 6 Click the Add button 7 The Add Items to Collection screen appears displaying all subfolders within the selected folder Subfolders are available if the Include subfolders field is checked for the collection content in the selected folder that is not part of the collection Note that the file types selection remembers your most recent choice and may filter which files appear You can change that selection if desired Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 307 8 Check boxes next to content to add to the collection You can only add content from the selected folder or possibly its subfolders Subfolders are available if the Include subfolders field is checked for the collection Click a subfolder to view its content To return to the parent folder cl
306. n only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks appear instead of the characters Field Description Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 168 NOTE Your Web developer can customize validation options For details see the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer s Guide section Customizing Validation Option Characteristics of Valid Response No validation Response is not checked Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked Non negative whole number or blank A positive whole number or no response Non negative whole number required A positive whole number Decimal number or blank A decimal number for example 12 345 or 12 or blank A leading minus sign is allowed The decimal point must be a period even in locales that normally use a comma Decimal numbers include whole numbers because the decimal point is implied That is 12 is 12 0000 Decimal number required A decimal number it cannot be blank of none one or two decimal places A leading minus sign is allowed The decimal point must be period even in locales that normally use a comma Decimal numbers include whole numbers because the decimal point is implied That is 12 is 12 0000 Percent
307. nd click the rectangle command drag a rectangle and release the mouse To change the rectangle s line size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 500 Redo Standard Toolbar Button Description If you use the Undo command and then decide that it was a mistake use this command It re applies the changes from the command that occurred before you pressed Undo See Also Undo on page 507 Reset Zoom Ratio Standard Toolbar Button Description Displays image at full size See Also Zoom In on page 507 Zoom Out on page 508 Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 501 Rotate Standard Toolbar Button Description Turns an image a specified number of degrees Note that the dialog box lets you rotate the image left or right 90 180 or 270 degrees any number of degrees between 1 and 359 Dialog Box Save Standard Toolbar Button Description Save changes to an image If required information is missing such as the image name you are prompted for this information Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 502 Dialog Box NOTE The dialog box only appears the first time you save the image If you later want to save it to a
308. nd click Refresh to see the folder Enter the required information in the fields Use the following table to assist you on page 72 Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 248 Viewing Information about a Content Item To learn about any content item follow these steps 1 Browse to or use the search to locate the content 2 Move the cursor next to the content title 3 Right click the mouse 4 Select Properties 5 A screen appears listing valuable information about the content See illustration below New gt Content Create a new content item within the selected folder Note After creating new content move the cursor to the left frame and click its folder This action refreshes the right frame so you can see the new content Adding Content on page 45 New gt Form Create a new form within the selected folder Note After creating new form move the cursor to the left frame and click its folder This action refreshes the right frame so you can see the new form Working with HTML Forms on page 144 View Small Medium Large All Small All Medium All Large Change the size of the selected or all thumbnails Changing the Thumbnail Size on page 242 View Properties View information about selected content Viewing Information about a Content Item on page 248 Menu Option Descriptio
309. nded description of the poll 8 Click the Next button 9 This screen lets you add a poll question and the possible choices NOTE This screen allows you to add eight choices If you have more than eight choices you can add them in the forms editor after clicking the Done button Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 205 10 Click the Next button 11 This screen informs you that you have finished entering the basic poll information and you need to click the Done button to further edit and view the form s fields 12 After clicking the Done button the form editor launches and allows you to edit the existing fields and properties In addition you can set post back and schedule information add metadata and comments change the title and submit the poll for publication NOTE From this screen you can add additional choices to your poll by right clicking on the choices field and clicking properties See Also Inserting a Choices Field on page 174 Steps to Create a Survey To create a new survey follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new edition of a survey in another language by copying an existing form and translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 432 NOTE For the steps to create a new poll see Steps to Create a Poll on page 203 For the steps to create a new form see Creating a New Form on page 147
310. ndow in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 556 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 10 Click OK Using Bookmarks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 556 Changing the Destination Window While defining hypertext you can use the Target Frame field on the Hyperlink dialog box to change the window in which the destination page appears The possible values that you can enter into the Target Frame field are explained below If you want the destination page to appear Click this in the Target Frame field In a new browser window on top of the current browser New Window _blank In the same position within the browser window The new window replaces the current one Same Window _self Note this is the default If your page contains frames in the frame that contains the frame with the hyperlink Parent Window _parent If your page contains frames in the full display area replacing the frames Browser Window _top If your page contains frames in the frame with the specified name Enter the name of the frame Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 557 Using Hyperlinks Use hyperlinks to let a user jump from any word phrase or image to another Web page The page can be within your network that is on an intranet or anywhere on the
311. ne the column Table Properties Button None Menu Table gt Table Properties Keystroke None Launches a dialog box that provides information about the table in which the cursor is located In this dialog box you can further define the table Show Hide Grid Lines Button Menu Table gt Hide Grid lines Keystroke None Shows or hides the grid lines that make up a table Design View Button Menu View gt Design View Keystroke None Switches editor from HTML code view to design view Code View Button Menu View gt HTML View Keystroke None Switches editor from design view to HTML code view Window View Button Menu View gt Window View Keystroke None Launches the current editor into its own window Command Access to Command Description Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 588 Document Navigator Button None Menu View gt Document Navigator Keystroke None Similar to Select this function adds a clickable menu bar to the editor when in design mode This lets you to highlight a section of text a table or section of a table The menu is dynamic and the selections can change depending on the location of the cursor For example if the cursor is in a table the menu has the following entries html body table tr td and content Show Paragraph Markers Button Menu View Show gt Paragra
312. ng changing the color depth inserting text This section explains WebImageFX Important WebImageFX is an external add on product available from Ektron Using WebImageFX Choosing the Image If you double click an image it appears within WebImageFX You can also right click the mouse and choose Image Editor from the menu that appears Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 478 WebImageFX looks similar to eWebEditPro XML but has different menu and toolbar buttons If the Image Edit button appears on your toolbar you can click it to open WebImageFX If no image is selected when you press the button or click the menu command a blank editor appears and you can use the File gt Open command to choose an image Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 479 Once the image is in WebImageFX you can use the buttons and menu options to edit it The rest of this chapter describes those buttons and menu options Saving the Image When you finish editing the image you can insert it into the content by pressing the Exit button Alternatively you can save the image to a local or network folder using the Save button When you insert the image into the content WebImageFX checks the file extension If the image is a gif file it is saved as a png file in your temporary directory For example test gif is saved
313. ng a Calendar Event on page 369 as a reference 5 Click the Save button Editing Recurring Events After a recurring series of events is added to a calendar you may edit it to change the title location hyperlink and event type Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 379 NOTE You cannot edit event dates or times To change those delete and re enter the series of events To edit a recurring series of events follow the steps in Editing a Single Event on page 377 The only difference is the Update all recurring events associated with this event box To apply the edits to only the instance of the event that you selected uncheck the box To apply the changes to all instances check the box Deleting Calendar Events The section explains how to delete a single event or a recurring series of events NOTE You can only delete a calendar event if you have add edit or delete permission for the content folder to which the calendar is assigned Deleting a Single Occurrence Calendar Event You can easily delete calendar events that are no longer needed or do not belong to the calendar they were added to To delete a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar Events screen for the date that contains the event you want to delete as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 369 2 Click the event you want to delete 3 The
314. ning this procedure See Also Managing Tasks on page 381 1 If you are creating a new form assign the task at Step 3 of the Forms Wizard If you are editing a form assign the task on the form s Edit Properties screen In both cases you identify only users and groups to whom the task will be assigned whenever a site visitor completes the form Ektron CMS400 NET assigns the remaining task information 2 You complete the form and make it available on your Web site 3 A visitor to your site fills out and submits the form Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 185 4 A task is created and assigned to users and groups you identified in Step 1 5 Any Ektron CMS400 NET user can view all tasks created via form submission in the Smart Desktop See illustration below See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 21 Ektron CMS400 NET users and administrators can also view and update tasks assigned to them via the Task screens on the Smart Desktop See Viewing a Task on page 395 and Viewing a Task s History on page 405 Task Information The task created upon form submission has the following information Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 186 email Automatically Generated Upon Form Submission An email is automatically sent to every user named in Step 1 above who has a vali
315. nk to a page outside your Web site submenu a link to another menu In the illustration below the menu on the right is a submenu It appears when the user hovers the cursor over the menu item to the left RC Planes The right pointing arrow indicates that a submenu is available Access to the Menus Feature There are three ways to access the Menus feature the Workarea by choosing the associated content folder then clicking the View Menus button the Workarea by choosing Modules gt Menus the Edit Menu option on the sample menu displayed above If you choose the first or second option you then select a specific menu Next that menu appears on the View menus screen For the third option the selected menu appears on the View Menu screen From the View Menus screen you can perform the following actions on a menu Create a new menu Edit menu information URL and template link Translate the menu into another language Delete the menu Add or remove items Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 319 Change the sequence of menu items Edit menu items For submenus add remove items change sequence of menu items edit menu information edit information about menu items Managing Menus Ektron CMS400 NET gives you the flexibility to add edit view and delete a menu The following sectio
316. not currently appear on the toolbar 4 To add a menu to your toolbar that appears on the list but is not currently checked place the cursor on the menu name and click the mouse A check mark appears and the menu appears on the toolbar To remove a menu from your toolbar place the cursor on the menu name and click the mouse The check mark disappears and the menu no longer appears on the toolbar Learn about Removing or Adding Menu Items Customizing Your Toolbar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 438 Removing or Adding Menu Items 1 Place the cursor on the toolbar 2 Right click the mouse 3 A dropdown list appears Click Customize NOTE If Customize does not appear on the menu you are not authorized to customize the toolbar 4 The Toolbar Customization dialog box appears 5 Click the menu that you want to edit Customizing Your Toolbar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 439 6 Click the Commands tab A new screen appears Using the Customize Toolbar Dialog Box The left half of the Commands screen lists the buttons in the sequence in which they appear on the menu The right half of the screen lists available buttons that do not currently appear on the menu To add a button to the toolbar drag it from the right side of the screen to the location on the left side where you want it to appear You can also click a button then c
317. ns explain how to do that Adding a New Menu on page 319 Adding a Menu Item on page 325 Adding New Content to a Menu via Navigation Link on a Web Page on page 333 Editing a Menu on page 333 Editing a Menu Item on page 335 Editing Types of Menu Items on page 339 Viewing a Menu on page 344 Reordering Menu Items on page 348 Deleting a Menu on page 349 Deleting a Menu Item on page 351 Working with Menus in a Multi Language System on page 352 See Also Working with Menus on page 316 Adding a New Menu You can add a new menu by navigating to the folder that contains its content or by choosing Modules gt Menus from the left frame of the Workarea If you choose Modules gt Menus Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 320 you cannot select the menu s language it assumes the current language In contrast if you create a menu after choosing a content folder you can select a language during the menu creation process you cannot select the menu s folder it is automatically assigned to the root folder In contrast if you create a menu after choosing a content folder you select a folder while creating the menu Adding a Menu via Content Folder 1 Navigate to the content folder that contains the content you want to display
318. ns on the Dialog Box on page 450 Finding Text 1 In the Find What field type the text that you want to find in the content 2 Set dialog box options see Additional Options on the Dialog Box on page 450 3 Click Find Next to find the next occurrence of the find text Finding and Replacing Text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 450 Finding and Replacing Text 1 In the Find What field type the text that you want to find 2 In the Replace With field type the text to replace the find text 3 Set dialog box options see Additional Options on the Dialog Box on page 450 4 If you want to replace all occurrences of the find text with the replace text click Replace All NOTE You can undo replacements one at a time using the Undo button replace only the highlighted term with the replace text click Replace find the next occurrence of the find text and optionally replace it with the replace text click Find Next change the highlighted term using the editor exit the Find and Replace dialog move to the term and edit as needed To restart the search press the Find Next button 5 Continue to find and optionally replace or edit until you reach the end of the text Additional Options on the Dialog Box The dialog box also lets you do the following Specifying a Search Direction
319. nserting a Text Area Field Use a text area field when you want the site visitor to enter an unformatted free text response A text area field is similar to a Text Field except it scrolls vertically to accept more text To insert a text area field follow these steps 1 Place a text area field onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 157 2 The following dialog appears Fields on the Textarea Dialog Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 173 Field Description Descriptive Name Enter a description of the field This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 187 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below Default value If you want to set a default value for this field enter it here For example if this field collects a city and most users enter New York enter New York as the value Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this fi
320. nter an unformatted free text response To insert a plain text field follow these steps 1 Place a plain text field onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 157 2 The following dialog appears Field Description Descriptive Name Enter a description of the field This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 187 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below Value Enter the value that will be saved with this field when the form is submitted Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 166 Fields on the Plain Text Field Dialog Field Description Descriptive Name Enter a description of the field This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 187 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field If you do
321. nual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 510 Creating a Table To create a table click the table button then click Insert Table from the menu When you do the Insert Table dialog box appears You can also access this dialog box after you insert it You would do this if you wanted to edit any of the information entered in the dialog To access this dialog after insertion follow these steps 1 Click the table 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Table Properties from the menu Introduction to Tables Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 511 When creating a table you can specify the number of rows and columns width horizontal alignment on the page background color or background picture border size and color For more information about managing tables see Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 520 For more information about managing individual cells within a table see Working with Table Cells on page 535 Deleting a Table To delete a table follow these steps 1 Move the cursor over the table until the cursor becomes a four headed arrow 2 Click the mouse button The table becomes selected small squares appear around it 3 Press lt Delete gt Introduction to Tables Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 512 Inserting a Table within a Table You can insert a table w
322. ocument s Properties If the host application such as Microsoft Word has a Properties screen you can access it by clicking File gt Properties or the Properties option on the host application s Document Management menu NOTE CMS400 NET installs the Document Management menu on the Office application Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 269 Save Check in and Publish When you finish editing a document you have four options for what to do next They are explained in the following table You can carry out any option by clicking an Ektron CMS400 NET toolbar button or a Document Management menu option illustrated below Action Document Management Menu Option Toolbar button Check document in so you and others can continue to edit it Check in Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 270 Importing One Office Document Your computer or network may have Office documents that you want to manage using DM Follow these steps to import any document into Ektron s Document Management functionality See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 274 and Drag and Drop File Uploading vs the Add Content Buttons on page 291 1 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the folder in which you want to place the document
323. on 6 Using the Add button select the content to add to the collection Navigate through the folders to the content you want to add You can only add content in the selected language Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Does Not Exist 1 Navigate to the folder in which you will create the collection 2 Click the View Collections button The View Collections screen is displayed 3 Click the Add button and enter basic information about the collection This screen is described in Creating a Collection on page 301 4 The View Collections in Folder screen appears Click the collection you just created 5 From the Add drop down list select the language of the new collection 6 Using the Add button select the content to add to the collection Navigate through the folders to the content you want to add You can only add content in the selected language Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 314 Comparison of Collections Menus and the List Summary Features A menu a collection and the ListSummary function are similar in that they let you add a list of links to a Web page The following table compares these features to help you understand which one would best accommodate your needs for a particular page NOTE To implement these features the assistance of a developer is required Collection Menu List Sum
324. on This field should be set by a system administrator It is described in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Should Office documents added to this folder be published as PDF Specify if Office documents in this folder are published to the Web as PDF files HTML files or neither This field should be set by a system administrator It is described in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Metadata tab See Entering Custom Metadata on page 87 Field Description Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 74 6 Click the Save button Deleting Folders You can delete folders that are no longer needed NOTE The ability to delete a folder is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see a Delete Folder button on the View Contents of Folder screen you do not have permission to do so CAUTION Deleting a content folder permanently deletes its content quicklinks and subfolders To delete a content folder follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content folder you want to delete 2 Click the Delete Folder button 3 A confirmation message appears 4 If you are sure you want to delete the content folder click OK 5 The screen is refreshed and the folder is deleted Web Alerts tab See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Web Alerts Feature Field Description
325. on page 497 choose color Sets the color for an annotation before you insert it Choose Color on page 485 choose font Sets the color of text before you insert it Choose Font on page 486 freehand Draws a line in any shape that you want Freehand on page 492 line Draws a straight line Line on page 494 oval Draws an oval Oval on page 496 polygon Draws a polygon a closed figure surrounded by straight lines Polygon on page 498 rectangle Draws a rectangle Rectangle on page 499 text Inserts text Text on page 504 Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 484 If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area Dialog Box Brightness Standard Toolbar Button Description Increases or decreases an image s brightness You can select a brightness level from 32 brightest through 32 darkest If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area NOTE You cannot adjust brightness if the image s bit depth is 8 or fewer See Also Specifying Color Depth on page 508 Dialog Box Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 485 Choose Color Standard Toolbar Button Description Lets you choose the color of an annotation before you insert it To change an annotation s color after inserting it place the
326. on page 508 Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 482 Image Menu Options Toolbar Button Command Brief Description For more information see image info Displays information about an image Image Info on page 493 dimensions Modifies an image s width and height Dimensions on page 490 color depth Changes the number of colors available to an image Color Depth on page 487 blur Blurs or softens an image Blur on page 483 sharpen Sharpens edges within an image Sharpen on page 503 brightness Changes an image s brightness Brightness on page 484 contrast Changes the difference between light and dark areas of an image Contrast on page 488 horizontal flip Reverses an image horizontally left to right Horizontal Flip on page 493 vertical flip Flips an image vertically top to bottom Vertical Flip on page 507 rotate Turns an image a specified number of degrees Rotate on page 501 Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 483 Annotation Menu Options Blur Standard Toolbar Button Description Blurs or softens an image You can select a level of blur from 0 through 4 Toolbar Button Command Brief Description For more information see pointer selection Click an annotation to select it Pointer Selection
327. on 1 126 4 Click inside the checkbox of every user or group to receive a copy of the report Searching for Report Recipients If you cannot easily find a user a search of all users and groups is available To use it follow these steps 1 Display the report that you want to email 2 Click the email button 3 A list of all users and user groups in your Ektron CMS400 NET appears 4 Click the Search for User button 5 The following screen appears 6 Enter whatever information you know about the users 7 Click the Send email button 8 All users that satisfy the search criteria appear on a new screen 9 Click the checkbox of every user or group to receive the report Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 127 Approvals Reports Each content item awaiting your approval appears on this report Thus you can quickly find all such content without searching through every folder The View All Content Awaiting Approval screen displays the following information about this content Below is an example of the View All Content Awaiting Approval screen Approving Declining Content From the approvals report you can approve or decline content that was submitted to you The steps below explain how to do so Field Description Title Title of content Request Type Request made for the content Either Publish or Delete Start Date S
328. ontent updating an image reordering a collection The Tasks folder displays all tasks that are either assigned to you or that you assigned to another user or user group You can also assign tasks to yourself A task may or may not be related to a specific piece of content If it is you can access content then attach a task to it This kind of task is managed just like the other tasks but you can also view and update it via the attached content For more information see Viewing a Task on page 395 This chapter explains how to work with tasks through the following topics Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 382 Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 389 Creating a Task from the Web Site on page 394 Creating a Task via the Content Folder on page 394 NOTE Tasks can also be created automatically when forms are submitted See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 184 Viewing a Task on page 395 Editing a Task on page 400 Adding Comments to Tasks on page 401 Deleting a Task on page 404 Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 382 Viewing a Task s History on page 405 Task Module Toolbar on page 406 Creating a Task via the Task Folder This topic consists of the following subtopics Accessing the Tasks Folder
329. or Last user to edit the content Date Modified Date and time content was last edited Path Folder location of content in Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 132 4 The content s position in the approval chain is indicated by red text on the Approvals line Content Pending Start Date Report The Pending Start Date Report displays all content that was approved but whose start dates haven t occurred Each content item on the report contains the following information Editing Content with a Pending Start Date You may edit content on the Pending Start Date Content report To do so follow these steps Column Description Title Title of content ID ID number assigned to content by Ektron CMS400 NET Last Editor Last user to edit the content Start Date Date and time content will go live on Web site Path Folder location of content in Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 133 1 Click the content you want to view 2 The View Content page is displayed 3 Using the toolbar at the top of the page perform any action available Refresh Reminder Report The Refresh Report displays all content whose end date has passed and whose archive option is set to Refresh Report This content is still visible on the Web site Its appearan
330. or user 409 word wrap 550 Word Microsoft editing in 458 editing XML documents 459 inserting from 566 uploading image from 459 work offline document management feature 270 275 work page size customizing for user 409 workarea accessing 16 button floating toolbar 5 definition 16 toolbar buttons 34 add 34 add calendar event 34 add content block 34 add content folder 34 add library items 34 add task 34 approvals 34 approve 34 approve all 34 archived content 34 calendar 35 check in 35 check out 35 collections 35 delete 35 delete content 35 delete folder 35 do not apply XSLT 35 edit 35 insert library item 35 link check 35 overwrite 36 preview 36 publish 36 remove 36 reorder 36 restore 36 save to database 36 search 36 show calendar 36 submit 36 view date 36 view difference 36 view history 37 view published 37 view staged 37 WYSIWYG view as toolbar and menu option 428 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 viii X XSLT removing from XML content block 114 Y yellow content border color meaning 592 Z zoom in WebImageFX command 507 zoom out WebImageFX command 508
331. or more areas of the page Each surrounded area is content that can be edited independently The border disappears when you move the cursor out of the area Your system administrator controls the design of each page and determines where the content appears NOTE The colored borders appear when you are not in site preview mode See Also Site Preview on page 12 Also your administrator can set up your system so that the borders always appear on a page instead of appearing only when you move the mouse over them Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 3 The advantage of this feature is that you can see a Web page as it will appear to visitors to your site Continue editing until you are satisfied with its appearance To learn what the border color indicates see Appendix A Content Statuses on page 592 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 4 The Floating Toolbar When content s border is visible you can right click the mouse to display a floating toolbar an example is in the green box below Toolbar buttons let you act on the displayed content and view important information about it The toolbar buttons change depending on the content s status or your permissions for the content For example one toolbar button lets you edit the content while another lets you view previous versions of
332. or page Identify a file or a page on your Web site that is launched when the visitor completes the form An example of a file is a white paper a common file format is PDF that the visitor requested An example of a page is one that lets the visitor download your product Redirect to an action page and forward form data See Redirect to an Action Page and Forwarding Form Data on page 151 Report on the form See Making Form Results Available to Site Users on page 152 10 Now that you have completed information about the form you can enter the form s content This procedure is described in Creating a Form s Content on page 155 Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 150 Composing the Postback Message The postback message can contain text or graphics just like any other HTML content Typically it acknowledges the site visitor s completion of the form For most sample forms provided sample text appears in the editor Modify it as you wish using Ektron CMS400 NET s editor to change the font size style color insert library items etc You can also insert fields that retrieve form information upon its submission Use the Insert Fields pull down to do this illustrated below All form fields appear on the list In addition the following fields can be used to insert form information into the postback message although they re not
333. or submits an entire form not as soon as the input is entered If invalid input is found the error message that you define appears Cancel Close the editor without saving changes Button or Tab Description Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 162 The site visitor must change his response to conform to the validation rule When he does the next field is checked and if that is invalid its error message appears etc TIP If you apply validation rules to more than one field include the field name in the error message For example enter The name field only allows text This is good practice because error messages only appear after the form is submitted and if the message does not identify the field the user may not know which field needs correction Form Fields Inserting a Checkbox Field A Checkbox field is only one character wide and accepts one of two possible values checked or unchecked For example To insert a checkbox field follow these steps 1 Place a checkbox type field onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 157 2 The following dialog appears Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 163 Fields on the Checkbox Dialog Field Description Descriptive Name Enter a description of the field This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing
334. or the folder The following table explains each column Column Description Title The title assigned to the collection by the creator ID The ID assigned to the collection by Ektron CMS400 NET This number is used to store and retrieve the data to from the database Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 298 To learn more about a collection and perform tasks on it proceed to Viewing a Collection on page 299 Finding a Collection Using the Collections Folder To access the Collections screen that displays all collections in all content folders follow these steps 1 From the top level folders in the lower left frame of your Workarea click Modules 2 Click the Collections folder 3 The Collection Report screen appears 4 The screen has four columns described below Date Modified When the collection was last edited URL The default template used to display the content Column Description Column Title Description Title Title given to collection by user who created or last edited it ID ID number assigned by Ektron CMS400 NET Developers use this number to reference the collection in ecmCollection custom function Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 299 You can click any collection to view information about it and perform tasks on it See Viewing a Collection on pa
335. ou have an Excel spreadsheet open outside DM then you open one within it and navigate to another template page on your Web site then return to the spreadsheet outside DM a new open worksheet appears Close it If you are working with an Excel spreadsheet the File and Open toolbar buttons within Excel appear active that is not grayed out but are not operable Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 266 If you access an Office document on a Web page you must close that instance of the browser before proceeding to another Web page If you do not close the browser and continue to add or edit documents the original document continues to use up your computer s resources You cannot import an Excel file that contains macros or JavaScript Creating a New Microsoft Office Document To create a new Office document follow these steps 1 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the folder in which you want to place the document See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 32 3 Click the down arrow next to the add dropdown list to view a list of items you can add 4 Select Office Documents 5 The default language appears in the View dropdown list To save the document under a different language click the dropdown list and select the language Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS40
336. ou select the Edit Menu Your Webmaster determines which menu options are available Section 508 Compliance Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 570 7 Press the down arrow key until the desired option is highlighted Then click the option to perform the action Section 508 Tables You can apply the following information to any table to make it 508 compliant Information Where applied For more information see Heading Rows Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 573 Heading Columns Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 573 Section 508 Compliance Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 571 WARNING The Section 508 Table Properties dialog only works if Internet Explorer version 6 0 or higher is installed Once that is installed any browser can be used Netscape FireFox IE etc WARNING Even if you change no values on the screen you must open the Accessibility dialog whenever you modify a table for example add a new row The table s properties required for Section 508 are generated when you click OK to close the dialog box To create a 508 compliant table follow these steps 1 Create a new table or edit an existing one as explained in Introduction to Tables on page 509 2 Select the table by moving the cursor to a table border until you see a four headed arrow illustrated below When a
337. oving content 309 reordering content blocks 310 toolbar button 35 toolbar buttons 301 using default template or quicklinks 303 viewing 299 color background cell applying 539 deleting 540 table applying 528 deleting 529 cell border 538 default 518 content block border meaning 592 depth specifying 508 font changing 429 picture border 471 table border 531 default 516 columns table adding 521 deleting 521 spanning 543 specifying 520 comments adding another 579 adding to a task 401 inserting into content 577 updating 579 viewing 579 Compare source code field eWebDiff 108 Compare visual aspect field eWebDiff 108 comparing content 104 content area explained 109 Diff tab 109 how status affects comparison 105 published tab 110 setup window 107 staged tab 110 toolbar 106 view tabs 109 when available 105 window explanation 105 content see also content block active definition 593 adding as menu option 328 adding to collection 305 approval process 98 archived toolbar button 34 archiving see archiving area expanding 44 awaiting approval 22 checked in definition 594 checked out definition 596 collaboration 577 comparing see comparing con tent currently checked out 22 declining see declining content difference view button floating toolbar 5 viewing 104 editing toolbar button 35 end date setting 78 folder add button 34 screen display 32 View History Restore 114
338. p you compare differences Back Go back to previous screen Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 129 Approving Multiple Content Items See Performing an Action on Several Content Items on page 123 The selected content is either submitted to the next publisher published immediately or deleted depending on the content s approval chain Checked In Report The Checked In Content report displays all the content currently in a checked in status The report displays the following information Submitting Multiple Content Items After selecting content use the submit toolbar option to submit it for approval or publication depending on your position in the approval chain Column Description Title Title of content ID ID number assigned to content by Ektron CMS400 NET Last Editor Last user to edit the content Date Modified Date and time content was last edited Path Folder location of content in Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 130 Checked Out Report The Checked Out Content report displays all content currently in a checked out status The report displays the following information After selecting content check it in using the Checkin button New Content Report The New Content report displays content in a new state that is it
339. pears 4 The sub folders appear in the left frame Files in the root folder library appear in the right frame You can use the dropdown list circled above to change the type of library files that appear To work with any library file click it When you do the View Library screen appears providing additional information about the item From here you can Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 211 edit its title file name or description overwrite it find content linked to it delete it For more information see Viewing Files on page 218 The following table explains the toolbar buttons on the library screen NOTE Your system administrator determines which library folders you can access and which functions you can perform on library items within the folders Library Folder Properties To view the library folder s properties follow these steps 1 Click the Properties button Button Description For more information see Search library Searching the Library on page 212 View the library s properties screen Library Folder Properties on page 211 Add an image file quicklink or hyperlink to the library Copying Files to the Library on page 216 Select the type of Library file to work with Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 212 2 The Librar
340. ph Markers Keystroke None Shows or hides paragraph markers and other special markings related to formatting such as formatting for bulleted items Style Dropdown List Button Menu Format gt Style Keystroke None Choose from a predefined list of styles to apply to your text Font Button None Menu Format gt Font Keystroke None Choose from a predefined list of fonts Size Button None Menu Format gt Size Keystroke None Choose from a predefined list of sizes for your font Bold Button Menu Format gt Bold Keystroke Control B Make the text bold Command Access to Command Description Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 589 Italics Button Menu Format gt Italic Keystroke Control I Make the text italic Underline Button Menu Format gt Underline Keystroke Control U Make the text underlined Align Left Button Menu Format gt Align Left Keystroke Control L Aligns the text to the left of the page For example This text is aligned left Align Center Button Menu Format gt Align Center Keystroke Control E Aligns the text to the center of the page For example This text is aligned center Align Right Button Menu Format gt Align Right Keystroke Control R Aligns the text to the right of the page or table cell For example This text is aligned
341. pleted The due date appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by due date Technical note If you see a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windows Control Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make sure the settings apply to the default user Field Description Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 387 5 Click the Save button If email notification is enabled an email is sent to the user user group to which the task was assigned Selecting Content for the Task When you click Select Content from the Add Task screen the Select Content screen appears It shows only content in the selected language Description Add additional information to describe the task The description appears on the View Task screen circled below Field Description Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 388 You should only select a content folder for which you have permissions To select a piece of content to assign to the task follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content Click any folder to open it 2 Click the circle to the left of the content 3 Press the Save button Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 389
342. ppears Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 403 4 Enter your comment in the editor Note that you can format and spell check the text using the toolbar buttons 5 Click the button 6 The View Task screen reappears with the comment at the bottom of the page Updating Comments To update a comment follow these steps 1 Access the View Task screen that contains the comment you want to update as described in Viewing a Task on page 395 2 Click the comment s Date Time link illustrated below Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 404 3 The Comments window opens with the comment displayed 4 Update the comment 5 Click the button Deleting a Task You can easily delete a task that is no longer needed For example the user who assigned a task would typically delete it when it is completed To delete a task follow these steps 1 Access the View Task screen for the task as described in Viewing a Task on page 395 2 Click the Delete button Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 405 IMPORTANT The Delete button only appears if your system administrator has granted you permission to delete tasks For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Permissions 3 A confi
343. r Assigning Border Size on page 533 Cell Padding The space in pixels between the cell text and a cell s border Assigning Cell Padding on page 551 Cell Spacing The space in pixels between a cell and surrounding cells Assigning Cell Spacing on page 552 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 517 The Cell Properties Dialog Box The Cell Properties dialog box lets you manipulate most elements of a cell s appearance The following table lists the fields on this dialog box and refers you to the section that explains each field Table Dialog Boxes and Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 518 The Table Context Sensitive Menu The following menu appears when you right click the mouse while the cursor is in a table Field s Lets you specify For more information see Rows Spanned If the cell spans two or more rows Spanning Rows or Columns on page 543 Columns Spanned If the cell spans two or more columns Spanning Rows or Columns on page 543 Width The minimum cell width Specifying the Width of a Cell on page 535 Word Wrap Whether text moves down to the next line when it reaches the specified width of a cell Word Wrap on page 550 Horizontal Alignment The alignment of data across a cell Setting Horizontal Alignment on page 545 Vertical A
344. r toolbar so that it contains only the buttons you use See Customizing Your Toolbar on page 436 This section explains Selecting Text on page 423 Applying Formatting Attributes to Text on page 424 Table of Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists on page 424 Selecting Text You select text before performing an action on it such as copying it To select all information on a page press Ctrl A To select a portion of the information on a page you have two choices Hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor across the data you want to select Hold down the Shift key and the right arrow key until the desired data is selected Toolbar Buttons Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 424 To select a single word place the cursor on the word and double click the mouse Selected text has different background and foreground colors as illustrated below Applying Formatting Attributes to Text Several buttons apply formatting attributes to text such as bold and italics There are two ways to apply these attributes Enter the text Then select the text and press the toolbar button The button is now in a pressed in condition and the text has the formatting attribute Press the toolbar button Then begin typing the text As you type the formatting is applied To stop applying the formatting press the b
345. r and menu option 426 pending start date content 598 pictures inserting see image upload properties image upload 463 pixels 470 pointer selection WebImageFX command 497 polygon WebImageFX command 498 position objects menu 431 prerequisites 10 preview button 36 floating toolbar 5 feature 12 print editor content toolbar button 435 profile users updating 407 viewing 407 properties button floating toolbar 5 content block 43 publish button 36 content to web site 96 published content block viewing 37 Q quicklinks 558 adding to content 229 broken finding 54 definition 209 using for a collection 303 viewing 230 R rectangle WebImageFX command 499 red content border color meaning 592 redisplay toolbars 440 redo toolbar and menu option 426 redo WebImageFX command 500 registered trademark character inserting 428 remove alignment toolbar button 434 remove button 36 remove XSLT from XML content block 114 reorder button 36 replace toolbar and menu option 426 replacing text 449 reports content approving content from report 127 awaiting approval 127 checked in content 129 checked out content 130 content to expire 135 declining content from report 127 editing content blocks 124 expired content 134 new 130 pending start date 132 refresh reminder 133 sorting and filtering 122 submitted 131 viewing content blocks 124 workflow 117 emailing 124 selecting content by folder 121 fold
346. r or its subfolders 2 Click the circle next to Content Block 3 Click the Next button 4 The Add New item screen appears listing all content in the folder and its subfolders in which you created the menu 5 Click any folder to display its content 6 Check all content you want to add to the menu 7 Click the Add Item button 8 The View Menu screen reappears showing the new content 9 Click the Edit icon next to each new content item to access the Edit Menu Item screen This screen lets you assign additional information to the menu item such as the target window See Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 321 Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Item To add a library asset as a menu item via a content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 325 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 326 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page on page 327 2 Click the radio button next to Library Asset option 3 Click the Next button 4 The library screen opens 5 Navigate to the folder whose assets you want to add 6 In the right frame select the type of asset to insert image hyperlink etc Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 330 NOTE To insert assets the menu s folder must contain library assets
347. ram is performed Click YES when the following screen appears When the installation program completes close and reopen the View Content Difference feature Published Displays currently published version Staged Displays the staged version of content See Also Staged Content on page 552 View Description Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 111 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Past versions of published content are available unless your system administrator purged them Your ability to view a content item s history is determined by your user privileges After viewing a previous versions of content you can replace the current version with any previous version NOTE This section explains how to view and possibly restore older versions of content To see a change by change comparison of two content items use the View Content Difference feature explained in Comparing Versions of Content on page 104 NOTE The Purge History feature deletes historical versions of content according to user defined criteria Therefore some previous versions may be unavailable See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual gt Managing Content Folders gt Folder Properties gt Purge History The View and Restore features are explained through the following subtopics Accessing Content History on page 111 T
348. ranges on the screen after you choose this option Gender Use the predefined choices for gender You can see the values on the screen after you choose this option Marital Status Use the predefined choices for marital status You can see the values on the screen after you choose this option Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 177 Allow Selection Click More than one to allow the site visitor to select more than one item on the data entry screen Otherwise click Only one For example if you click More than one and the choices are music art sports the user could select all three choices If you click Only one the user could only select one choice A selection is required Check this box if the user must select at least one item in the list Appearance Click Vertical List to arrange the choices vertically Click Horizontal List to arrange the choices horizontally Click List Box to display all choices in a box The box lengthens to display all entries Item Value Enter the value that is collected when the data entry user selects this item For example if Interests appears in the Name field and you want music to be collected when the data entry user selects this item and saves the page enter music here Item Text Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen After you insert this field onto the screen you can use eWebEditPro XM
349. rch Text field enter one or more words that you want to find within content forms and assets The search returns content that includes these words Entering one or more words here is optional That is you can use fields on the lower portion of the screen to find content without knowing any words contained in the content For example you can find every piece of HTML content that was modified by a certain user within the last 30 days If you check off HTML and Form content you can enter no search criteria and get a list of all HTML and Form content on your site However if you enter search text the search only finds items that include the search text and satisfy other criteria on the screen See Also Adding or Editing Metadata on page 86 The Noise Files If you are searching for assets Windows has a noise file that screens from the search every single letter of the alphabet as well as common words Examples of common words are about after all and also Avoid entering such words into the Search Text field because the search ignores them To find the list of noise words search your computer for files named noise xxx where xxx is a three letter abbreviation for the language For example noise eng lists English noise words Include Archived Content forms and assets that have been archived See Also Setting Archive Options on page 79 Check this box To search Working with Folders and Content Ektro
350. rds in the file s title The title is assigned by the user when the file is added to the library If a file s title matches the keywords the file appears on the search results screen The search also uses keywords to search through the file s internal name for example airplane gif if the Filename Search checkbox is checked description if the Description search checkbox is checked A keyword can be a complete or partial word But you can only enter a partial term for one word For example you can enter Adv and have the search return the content titled Adverse Drug Reactions But if you enter Adv Drug the search returns nothing You can enter several complete search terms but they must be in the correct sequence For example to find the topic titled Adverse Drug Reactions you can enter Adverse Reactions but cannot enter Reactions Adverse To find all files in a selected library folder enter nothing in this field Or to find all files in a selected library folder of a type for example images select the type and enter nothing in this field All Types The search considers all library asset types Images only The search only considers images Quicklinks Only The search only considers quicklinks Forms Only The search only considers forms Files Only The search only considers files Hyperlinks Only The search only considers hyperlinks Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Vers
351. re not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks appear instead of the characters Field Description Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 175 Fields on the Choices Dialog Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 176 Field Description Descriptive Name Enter a description of the field This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 187 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below List Custom You create your own set of choices Use the Item and Item List fields to do this Note If after seeing the following predefined choices you want to customize the choices available to site visitors return to this field replace the value with Custom then define the ranges you want in the Item field Age Ranges Use the predefined choices for age ranges You can see the ranges on the screen after you choose this option Numeric Ranges Use the predefined choices for numeric ranges You can see the
352. reen let you remove items from this list as well as rearrange them Place a check in the box of any item to be checked by default on the data entry screen If you do the user can accept the default or uncheck the item by clicking in the checkbox First item is not a Valid Selection Check here if the first item on the list is not a valid value but instead text that prompts the user to respond to the field An example of such text for a list of states would be Select a state If you check this box and the user selects the first value on the list most likely by default an error message appears when he tries to save the screen Field Description Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 182 Inserting a Calendar Field To insert a field that lets a site visitor select a date use a Calendar Field To do that follow these steps 1 Place a Calendar field onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 157 2 The following dialog appears Fields on the Calendar Field Dialog Field Description Descriptive Name Enter a description of the field This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 187 Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 183 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if t
353. ribed in Appendix A Content Statuses on page 592 You can only edit content for which you have permission and in one of the following statuses published checked in checked out by you submitted for your approval NOTE Once you check out content it cannot be checked out by other users until you check it in Metadata Edit Metadata Enter or edit this content s metadata Note All required metadata must be added before the content can be submitted into the approval chain See Also Adding or Editing Metadata on page 86 Comment Add Comment Briefly describe the content or comment on changes made when editing content The history comment appears on the View Content and Content History screens Schedule Add Start and End dates If you do not want to submit the content to the approval chain immediately enter when it will be submitted See Also Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 75 If appropriate enter a date when the content will no longer be viewable on the Web site See Also Setting an End Date on Content on page 78 Web Alerts Add or modify Web Alert Information See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Web Alert Feature Web Alert Feature on page 155 Tab Name Description Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 50 Steps in Editing Content Accessing the Ed
354. rmation on page 311 Deleting a Collection on page 311 Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 312 Comparison of Collections Menus and the List Summary Features on page 314 Finding Collections Every collection is assigned to a folder If you want to find the collections assigned to any folder navigate to it and click the Collection button For more information see Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 297 Since collections can be assigned to several content folders the Modules folder provides a central Collections folder which displays all collections on one screen regardless of their content folder For more information see Finding a Collection Using the Collections Folder on page 298 Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 297 Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder To access collections for a content folder follow these steps 1 Click the content folder that contains the collection 2 The folder s content appears in the right frame 3 If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language support features select the language See Also Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 312 4 Click the Collections button 5 The View Collections screen appears The screen displays each collection created f
355. rmation message appears 4 Click OK Viewing a Task s History Ektron CMS400 NET maintains a history of all events in the life of a task as well as any comments entered As examples the task history shows when and by whom the task was created when it changed to Active when it was linked to content when its state changed when it was approved etc You can view the task s history until the task is purged To view a task s history follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View Task screen as explained in Viewing a Task on page 395 2 Click the History button 3 The history of task events appears example below Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 406 Task Module Toolbar The following table explains the toolbar buttons available while managing tasks Button Name Description More Information Add Comment Add a comment to the task Adding Comments to Tasks on page 401 Add Task Access the Add Task screen from the View Content page Task Module Toolbar on page 406 Add Task Access Add Task screen from task module folder Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 383 Back Return to previous page Calendar Select a date Delete Task Delete a task Deleting a Task on page 404 Edit Task Edit a task Editing a Task on page 400 Save Save task information Update Save task information
356. rnal Hyperlink Menu Item To edit an external hyperlink menu item via its content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Navigate to the menu that you want to edit by referencing Viewing a Menu on page 344 2 The View Menu screen displays the menu items 3 Click the edit icon next to the external hyperlink you want to edit 4 The Edit Menu Item screen opens Update as needed Use the table below to guide you through the fields Name Description Title Title of the new external hyperlink menu item Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 344 5 Click the Save button Editing a Submenu Menu Item To edit a submenu menu item via its content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Navigate to the menu for which you want to edit the menu items for by referencing to Viewing a Menu on page 344 2 The View Menu screen opens displaying a list of all menu items 3 Click the submenu icon to display its contents Viewing a Menu Just like editing an existing menu you can view a menu via its content folder menus module navigation link on a Web page URL Link The URL link for the external hyperlink For example www google com Name Description To edit a See this section Content Editing a Content Menu Item on page 339 Library Asset Editing a Library Asset Menu Item on
357. rofile customizing work page height 410 customizing work page size 409 customizing work page width 409 landing page after login 410 see profile set Smart Desktop as start location 410 V validation HTML form 161 version number viewing 431 434 vertical flip WebImageFX command 507 View Content Awaiting Approval 127 view content difference 104 button floating toolbar 5 screen first use 110 view date toolbar button 36 view difference toolbar button 36 view history button floating toolbar 5 toolbar button 37 view preferences toolbar button 434 view published toolbar button 37 view staged toolbar button 37 ViewAllMenus 316 viewing HTML 563 W WebImageFX assigning new name to image 479 choosing image 477 commands blur 483 brightness 484 choose color 485 choose font 486 contrast 488 copy 489 create new 489 crop 489 delete 490 dimensions 490 exit 491 exit without save 492 freehand 492 horizontal flip 493 image info 493 line 494 open 495 oval 496 paste as new image 497 pointer selection 497 polygon 498 rectangle 499 redo 500 rotate 501 save 501 save as 502 select 503 sharpen 503 text 504 twain acquire 506 twain source 506 undo 507 vertical flip 507 zoom in 507 zoom out 508 introduction 477 menu commands 479 saving image 479 specifying color depth 508 toolbar buttons 479 whole word match 452 width table setting by percentage 523 setting by pixels 525 width work page customizing f
358. rom that source using Twain Acquire Limitations You can only acquire one page at a time Few digital cameras support twain Usually digital cameras resemble a hard drive or use proprietary software to extract images Ektron does not support an interface to proprietary software Not all scanners support the twain standard Twain Source Standard Toolbar Button Description Lest you select a source for acquiring an image such as a scanner or digital camera See Also Twain Acquire on page 506 Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 507 Undo Standard Toolbar Button Description Reverses the most recent commands within the current editing session You can undo several commands at once by pressing the undo command repeatedly The first time you press the command the most recently completed command is undone The next time the second most recently completed command is undone etc See Also Redo on page 500 Vertical Flip Standard Toolbar Button Description Flips an image vertically top to bottom Click this command again to reverse the image vertically bottom to top Image before vertical flip Image after vertical flip Zoom In Standard Toolbar Button Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 508 Description Increases an image s magnification You can pre
359. ron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 446 Check Spelling Compare words in the editor to Microsoft WORD spelling list Checking Spelling on page 453 View as WYSIWYG HTML View and edit your page s HTML Viewing and Editing HTML on page 563 Picture Insert a picture Inserting Images on page 461 These options only appear if your site is using eWebEditPro XML Insert Custom tag tag name tag Attributes tag name tag Properties Work with XML tags Editing XML Web Pages on page 368 only available in the eWebEditPro XML User Guide Menu Option Lets you For more information see Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 447 Using eWebEditPro XML s Advanced Features Most of eWebEditPro XML s features are easy to learn For example to make your text bold you select the text and click the bold button However some of eWebEditPro XML s features are more complex For example when creating a table you must make several decisions the number of rows and columns the size of the border the spacing between cells etc The following sections explain eWebEditPro XML s more advanced features Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 448 Copying from Other Applications You can copy information from most other Windows applications into eWebEditPro XML and retain the formatting from the original appl
360. ron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 497 Dialog Box Paste as New Image Standard Toolbar Button Description After you copy or cut an image or an area of an image use paste as new image to insert it into a new file Before creating a new file WebImageFX asks if you want to save changes to current file Pointer Selection Standard Toolbar Button Description Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 498 Click an annotation to select it After you select an annotation you can perform functions on it such as delete it This command is a toggle which means the first time you click it it is on and the next time you click it it is off Polygon Standard Toolbar Button Description Draws a polygon that is a closed figure surrounded by straight lines To use this command follow these steps 1 Click the polygon command 2 Drag the line in one direction as far as you want 3 Drag the line in the other directions to complete the polygon 4 Double click the mouse to terminate the polygon 5 To change the polygon s line size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 499 Rectangle Standard Toolbar Button Description Draws a rectangle To use this comma
361. roup of fields applies to all file types The next group of search data is applied to any content in the selected folder For more information see Adding or Editing Metadata on page 86 The last group applies to Microsoft Office files only Fields that Apply to CMS Content and Assets Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 68 Search Data Fields Search criterion Description Title In CMS the content block or form title In AMS the Title field in the file s Properties window Comments In CMS the content block or form s comments which can be inserted via the Comment tab In AMS comments are inserted in the file s Properties window s Summary tab Date Created The file s creation date Date Modified The late date when the file was modified Language Each file in CMS and AMS is assigned a language property when it is created or imported Note This field determines the language of the content being searched The language dropdown list shown below which appears on every standard template supplied by Ektron has no effect on which content is searched Last Editor s Last Name The last name surname of the user who most recently changed the content or form block Summary The content block summary See Also Adding a Content Summary on page 82 CMS Status The content block status See Also Appendix A Content Statuses
362. rs and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 52 the content would usually remain and all formatting tables bullets etc is retained To copy content into new content block of a different language follow these steps 1 Go to the View Content screen for the content you want to translate 2 From the View drop down list select the original language 3 Use the Add drop down list in the upper right corner to select the language into which you want to translate the content 4 The Edit Content screen appears with original language content Translate into the new language then delete the original content If desired you can click the Translate button If you do a new screen prompts you to identify the original language new language and the glossary to use Then the content is translated If you like the translation click Paste Content and the translated content replaces the original Once the translated content is inserted into the editor you can edit it as needed 5 When you save the content it is saved as the edition of that content in the selected language Deleting Content NOTE The ability to delete content is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see a Delete button on the screen you do not have permission to do so Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 53
363. rt time an hour or a day Surveys are usually multiple questions and appear on your site for a longer time than a poll NOTE For information on scheduling when your polls and surveys appear on the site see Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 75 With polls and surveys you might choose to show the ongoing results to the end users after they have submitted their answers The following sections have information that a user creating a poll or survey might be interested in beyond the normal form information Making Form Results Available to Site Users on page 152 Viewing a Form s Information on page 192 Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 193 Steps to Create a Poll on page 203 or Form Properties View Content Properties Access view properties for the content Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 193 View language View If you can view forms in more than one language select a language from the drop down list Add select language Add select language Lets you copy current form into new block and translate it to selected language Translating Content on page 432 Button or Tab Name Description More Information Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 203 Steps to Create a Survey on page 205 For information on how to display
364. rted into content it can be viewed by any user who can edit the content To view a comment follow these steps 1 Edit the content that contains the comment 2 Within the content double click the comment icon 3 The Comments window opens Adding Another Comment To comment on an existing comment follow these steps 1 Access the View Comment window for the comment as described in Viewing a Comment on page 579 2 Insert the comment 3 Click the Insert button 4 The comment is saved and added to the top row of the comment table 5 Click the Close button Updating a Comment You can change a comment if needed To update a comment follow these steps Inserting Comments within Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 580 1 Access the View Comments window for the comment that needs to be updated 2 Click the Date Time link of the comment you want to edit 3 The comment editor opens with the selected comment in it 4 Update the comment 5 Click the Update button to save the changes Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 581 Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients IMPORTANT An additional editor license is required when using the Macintosh as a client and editing content For information on adding the license see the Setup Manual section Macintosh
365. rties dialog box 5 When you click that field a Windows Color selection box appears Click the color that you want to apply to the cell border See Also Using the Color Box on page 542 Specifying a Cell s Background Color Specifying a Table s Background Color on page 528 explains how to apply a background color to a table You can also apply a background color to a cell To apply a background color to a cell follow these steps 1 Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse Working with Table Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 540 2 Click Table from the menu 3 Click Cell Properties from the menu 4 Click the Background Color field on the Cell Properties dialog box 5 When you click that field a Windows Color selection box appears See Also Using the Color Box on page 542 6 Click a color to apply to the background of the cell Deleting a Cell s Background Color To delete a cell s background color click the Unassigned box in the Custom Background area of the Cell Properties dialog box Working with Table Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 541 Specifying a Background Image for a Cell Specifying a Background Image for a Table on page 530 explains how to apply a background image to a table You can also apply a background image to a cell Your Webmaster determines which
366. s Document Workflow An document proceeds through the same workflow as any other type of content A diagram is below Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 292 See Also Viewing Documents within the CMS on page 292 Deleting a Document on page 293 Approving Documents on page 293 Adding Documents to Collections and Menus on page 293 Document Reports on page 293 Viewing Documents within the CMS To view a document follow these steps 1 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the document s folder 3 From the View Content screen click the document 4 The View Content screen for the document appears Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 293 Deleting a Document You can only delete a document if its status is Checked In or Approved To delete a document follow these steps 1 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the document s folder 3 From the View Content screen click the document 4 The View Content screen for the document appears 5 Click the Delete button Like any type of content a document must go through the approval chain before it is removed Approving Documents Documents are placed into the approval chain just like other
367. s to edit Checked In Content on page 594 S yellow Submitted for Approval Saved and submitted into the approval chain See Also Approving Declining Content on page 94 Submitted Content on page 596 M yellow Marked for Deletion Requested for deletion Marked for Deletion Content on page 598 P grey Pending Go Live Date Approved but the Go Live date hasn t occurred yet Pending Start Date Content on page 598 T Awaiting Completion of Associated Tasks Task s assigned to content are not complete Appendix A Content Statuses Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 593 Active Content If content has a green border it is live on the Web site When content is active you can perform the following actions on it depending on your permissions The content s status remains active until it is checked out and changes are made to it D Pending Deletion Content was created with a future start date then checked in and deleted This status only remains until the start date is reached At that point the content is deleted Letter Border Color Meaning Content state More Information Button Name Description For more information see Edit Check out the content to change it Editing Content on page 49 Edit Summary Edit the brief summary used to describe the content Adding a Content Summary on pag
368. s option prints the currently displayed content whether it is the compared published or staged content Save Saves a copy in HTML format on your local machine or network When saved as a physical file the HTML may be edited However the changes are not saved to the Web Server Note The save option saves the version of the content you are viewing Comparing Versions of Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 107 Setup Click the Setup button to open the setup dialog box Typically a system administrator would edit these settings You can change the setup options to better suit your needs The following table explains each option Setup Opens setup dialog box to configure the settings Typically only an administrator would use this For more information see Setup on page 107 Help Displays additional information about the compare feature Exit Closes the window Button Name Description Option Description Compare Options Comparing Versions of Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 108 After updating setup information click OK to save changes Compare visual aspect Compares content as it would appear on a Web page Compare source code Displays compared content as source HTML Whitespace Options Ignore All Blank whitespace characters are ignored Smart Detect One or more consecutive whitespace char
369. s within Ektron CMS400 NET you can only store them Working with Managed Files on page 282 Multimedia Files that run in a media player such as sound and movie files Open Office Files normally created and edited using Open Office Working with Open Office Files on page 276 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 7 Workflow in Ektron CMS400 NET Organizations typically want a Web site that is updated frequently with the latest information They also want to decentralize the updating process so that non technical users from any department can make changes Further organizations want oversight over those changes to ensure the accuracy of the information that the content adheres to corporate guidelines etc Ektron CMS400 NET manages the lifecycle of content from creation through approval and publication It helps your organization set up a process for overseeing changes to a Web site indicate content s status within that lifecycle and inform the next approver that it is their turn to review the content Editing Content Finding Content Much of your work involves editing existing content or creating new content Ektron CMS400 NET provides three methods for finding content to be updated You can use whichever method is easiest Navigate through your Web site to the content you want to edit Find the content through the Workarea wh
370. scription Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 194 2 Click the Form Properties button 3 The Form Properties screen displays a subset of form information Title and Description Database or Mail if form data is emailed whenever a site visitor submits it enter mail property information below See Mail Properties on page 194 Form Submission when checked you can enter the number of times a user is allowed to submit a form in the Number of Submissions text field Assign task to see Assigning a Task to a Form on page 184 Form block s ID number Mail Properties Mail Properties Field Description To Email address to which the form is sent when submitted See Also Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form on page 195 From Text that appears in the email s From field See Also Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form on page 195 CC Text that appears in the email s CC field See Also Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form on page 195 Subject Text that appears in the email s subject field See Also Retrieving Form Data Into the Subject and Preamble Fields on page 197 Preamble Beginning text of the email See Also Retrieving Form Data Into the Subject and Preamble Fields on page 197 Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Man
371. sion 1 337 Editing a Menu Item via Menus Module To edit a menu via the Menus module follow these steps 1 Access the Menu Report screen as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 347 2 Click the menu you want to edit 3 The View Menu screen for that menu appears listing all items on the menu Tho following illustration lists the four types of menu options For more information on working with these options see Icons on the View Menus Screen on page 336 Web page on your site Edit Web page on your site Editing a Content Menu Item on page 339 Delete Web page on your site Removing a Menu Item via its Content Folder on page 351 External Web page Edit external Web page Editing an External Hyperlink Menu Item on page 343 Delete External Web page Removing a Menu Item via its Content Folder on page 351 Library asset Edit library asset Editing a Library Asset Menu Item on page 343 Delete library asset Removing a Menu Item via its Content Folder on page 351 Icon Menu item type Available actions For more information see Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 338 Editing a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page To edit a menu via navigation link on a Web page follow these steps 1 Access the template where you inserted the link to display the
372. splay button text in the title bar Check this box if you want any button s caption text to appear in the screen title s bar whenever a user moves the mouse over the button Note the word Update describing the button in the illustration below If you do not check this box the screen s title remains in the title bar when the user moves the mouse over the button as illustrated below Landing Page after login If you want one page in your Web site to appear after sign in enter the URL to that page You might select a page that leads to a group of pages that you maintain If you don t know the URL navigate to the page go to the browser address bar and select the text following the directory in which Ektron CMS400 NET resides For example if the browser address bar says http www ektron com customers aspx id 945 you would enter customers aspx id 945 here Set smart desktop as the start location in the Workarea If you want the Smart Desktop to appear as soon as you enter the Workarea click inside this check box See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 21 If you leave this check box blank when you enter the Workarea you go to the folder of the content specified at the Landing Page after login field Field Description Updating Your User Profile Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 411 8 Edit the fields as desired then click the Update button Inherit Tas
373. splays the information in the content history window See Also The Content History Window on page 113 The right side displays the selected version of the content After viewing a version of content you can perform these actions on it Actions are explained below Restoring a Previous Version NOTE The ability to restore content is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see a Restore button on the View Content History screen you do not have permission to do so Action Button Description More Information Restore Restore historical version of content Restoring a Previous Version on page 114 View Difference Compare historical version to current version Comparing Historical Versions on page 115 View History Report View summary list of all versions The Content History Window on page 113 Remove XSLT XML Content Only Remove XSLT applied to XML content Removing Applied XSLT on page 115 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 115 1 Select an historical version of the content that you want to restore from the left pane 2 Click the Restore button 3 The content history window closes and you return to the View Content page or the Web page with the content in a checked in status 4 If desired check out the content to make additional changes 5 Select
374. ss this command several times to continue to increase magnification See Also Zoom Out on page 508 Reset Zoom Ratio on page 500 Zoom Out Standard Toolbar Button Decrease an image s magnification You can press this command several times to continue to decrease magnification See Also Zoom In on page 507 Reset Zoom Ratio on page 500 Specifying Color Depth To specify an image s color depth that is the number of colors available to an image specify a bit depth The color depth is derived from the bit depth Here are the bit depth values Bit depth Color depth 1 2 colors 4 16 colors 8 256 colors 24 16M colors Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 509 Introduction to Tables Sometimes the information on your Web page looks better when displayed on a table Here is an example This section explains Creating a Table on page 510 Deleting a Table on page 511 Inserting a Table within a Table on page 512 See Also Table Dialog Boxes and Menus on page 513 Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 520 Working with Table Cells on page 535 Section 508 Tables on page 570 City Baseball Team Hockey Team Boston Red Sox Bruins New York Yankees Mets Rangers Chicago White Sox Cubs Black Hawks Introduction to Tables Ektron CMS400 NET User Ma
375. such as a scanner or digital camera Twain Source on page 506 Exit Save changes and return to eWebEditPro XML Exit on page 491 Exit without save Ignore changes return to eWebEditPro XML Exit without Save on page 492 Toolbar Button Command Brief Description For more information see copy Copies a selected area of an image Copy on page 489 Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 481 View Menu Options paste as new image Inserts copied image or area into a new file Paste as New Image on page 497 undo Reverses the most recent action Undo on page 507 redo Reapplies the changes from the command that occurred before you pressed Undo Redo on page 500 select Selects an area of an image You can then perform actions on the area such as blur and delete Select on page 503 crop Removes everything outside of selected area of an image Crop on page 489 delete Deletes selected area of an image Delete on page 490 Toolbar Button Command Brief Description For more information see Toolbar Button Command Brief Description For more information see reset zoom ratio Displays image at full size Reset Zoom Ratio on page 500 zoom in Increases an image s magnification Zoom In on page 507 zoom out Decreases an image s magnification Zoom Out
376. t management feature 288 using Ektron Explorer 253 E edit button floating toolbar 5 editing content block overview 7 content toolbar button 35 HTML 564 email address user editing 409 instant modifying 31 requirements 30 sending 29 where available 30 notification disabling 409 emailing workflow reports 124 end date setting for content 78 end time calendar event 371 eWebDiff window 107 exit without save WebImageFX command 492 exit WebImageFX command 491 Explorer Ektron changing thumbnail size 242 displaying 240 inserting external files 253 installing 234 introduction 232 search feature 243 extensions file allowed in library 212 image allowed in library 212 F file open toolbar button 434 file save to local computer toolbar button 434 files copying to library 215 extensions library setting 212 library inserting into content 224 overwriting 220 viewing 218 library editing title 220 find next toolbar and menu option 426 finding content block 7 text 449 floating toolbar 4 folders button for deleting 35 delete 74 information available when viewing 38 fonts background color 429 color 429 heading size 429 size 429 style 429 form elements toolbar 432 forms adding to content 229 HTML assigning task 184 creating 147 creating content block 155 database 200 deleting 200 editing content block 199 introduction 198 summary 199 field validation options 167 implem
377. t name of the editor who updated the content most recently the status of the content any metadata criteria assigned to the folder if the content includes Microsoft Word documents the size of the documents If the content includes Powerpoint presentations the number of slides in the presentation Each feature is explained below NOTE To help track words and phrases site visitors are entering on the search screen the Search Phrase Report provides a count of all phrases searched within a date range In Ektron CMS400 NET this report is available from the Smart Desktop gt Reports For documentation of this report see Search Phrase Report on page 141 Specifying the Kind of Content to Search Near the top of the screen check boxes let you determine the kinds of content to search NOTE Assets only appears if your organization has implemented Ektron s Document Management feature Check this box To search Content HTML content Forms HTML forms Assets Office documents and managed files See Also Using the Document Management Functionality on page 261 Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 58 IMPORTANT The search only considers content forms and assets whose Content Searchable box is checked The Content Searchable box appears on the item s View Properties screen Specifying a Search Word or Phrase In the Sea
378. t or editing existing Content 2 If adding new content enter a title and the content 3 Click the Schedule tab 4 Click the calendar button next to the Start Date field 5 A calendar pops up 6 Select the date and time when the content will become visible on the Web site Scheduling Content to Begin and End Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 77 7 Click the Done button 8 The date and time appear in the Start Date field NOTE When you select a time for content to go live that time depends on the server s system clock If the clock is incorrect the content will not go live at the intended time What Happens After I Set a Start Date After you save the content it appears on the Content Pending Start Date report which helps you keep track of content with a future start date See Also Content Pending Start Date Report on page 132 After you set a go live date and the content completes the approval chain two scenarios may occur The content is new The content already exists Each scenario is now explained Scheduling Content to Begin and End Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 78 Setting the Go Live Date on New Content When you set a go live date on new content it becomes viewable on the specified date and time as long as it completes the approval chain If a user accesses the page that contains the content be
379. t to the approval chain See Also Approving Declining Content on page 94 Entering Title and Keywords After you create or update content it is typically published to the World Wide Web WWW Programs that search the Web such as Google look at a page s title and keywords to determine if they should return your Web page with their results To improve search results Ektron CMS400 NET provides two fields within Metadata by default NOTE Your system administrator may enable or disable these fields for each folder Title appears on the search results screen to further define your Web page Adding or Editing Metadata Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 92 Keywords are searched by leading search programs along with the page s title Adding or Editing Metadata Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 93 After content is published to the Web site you can view the page source to see its metadata Below is the source of a sample Web page On this Web page notice the keywords are included in the meta tag and the title is in HTML tags These appear according to how the administrator sets up the metadata definitions Approving Declining Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 94 Approving Declining Content Your site administrator establishes an approval chain for each folder or even specific content
380. tals Format Summary of Selected Choices Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 189 This format totals for choice and select type fields the number of times each choice was selected Only choices that were selected at least once appear Sample Summary of Selected Choices Format Table of Values Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 190 The table of values shows the following information for each completed form a checkbox that lets you delete the response an internal identification number of the response the name of the user who submitted the form if he signed in to Ektron CMS400 NET beforehand If the user did not sign in anonymous appears date response was submitted descriptive name of each form field appears in the column header the value entered for each field appears below the header Sample of Table of Values Format List of Submitted Values The List of Submitted Values format provides the same information as the Table of Values but is formatted vertically rather than horizontally See Also Table of Values on page 189 Sample List of Submitted Values Format Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 191 Exporting Form Reports After you run a report you can export its data to a Microsoft Excel spreadshe
381. tandard view not Ektron CMS400 NET view The Workarea and Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 16 The Workarea and Smart Desktop The Workarea is a central screen from which you can perform all activities within Ektron CMS400 NET From it you can access the Smart Desktop view the system s top level folders navigate through the folder structure perform actions on content This chapter describes using the Workarea and Smart Desktop through the following subtopics Accessing the Workarea on page 16 Installing the Document Management Functionality on page 17 Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 21 Navigating Within the Smart Desktop on page 23 Sending Instant Email on page 29 Accessing the Workarea To access your Workarea follow these steps 1 Click the Workarea button at the bottom of the screen or the Workarea button in the content s floating toolbar 2 The Workarea appears 3 The following illustrates one of several screens that may appear in the Workarea Your system administrator determines which screen appears for you The Workarea and Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 17 Closing the Workarea To close the Workarea click in the upper right corner of the window When you close the Workarea you return to t
382. tart date if any assigned to the content Determines when content will go live on Web site Date Modified Date the content was most recently changed Submitted By User who submitted content for approval ID The ID number if the content Language The language of the content Path Path to content folder where content resides Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 128 Approve Decline One Content Item 1 Access your Approvals report in the Workarea see Approvals Reports on page 127 2 Click the content you want to approve or decline 3 The View Content Awaiting Approval page is displayed 4 Perform an action using the following table as a reference Button Name Description Publish Accept changes to content and publish it to site Note If there is a subsequent approver in the content s approval chain this button is replaced by a Submit button If you click Publish but the content item has an incomplete task assigned to another user the content cannot be published Instead the following error message appears The user to whom the task is assigned must complete it before you can publish the content Decline Reject changes and keep current version of content live on Web site Edit Check out content and make changes to it if desired View Published Staged Toggle between published and submitted versions of content This can hel
383. te File Name for this Folder Specify a template for content in this folder The template determines the layout of the page on which this content appears The template is also used as part of the Quicklink See Also A quicklink is a special kind of hyperlink that jumps to another content item on your Web site A regular hyperlink jumps to a Web page on the internet on page 209 A drop down list of templates already being used by your Web site appears below this field You can select any template from the list If you leave this field blank the template from the parent folder is inherited Important If you change a folder s template that action does not update quicklinks for existing content in the folder It only affects new content created after the template is changed However if LinkManagement is set to true in the web config file you don t need to update the template name within the quicklink The Link Management feature finds the correct template for the content Your system administrator should be able to assist you in choosing a template XML Configuration By default content and folders inherit XML configuration settings from their parent folders To break or restore inheritance place or remove a check in the checkbox next to Inherit XML Configuration For more information see the Managing XML chapter of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator s manual Multi Site Domain Configurati
384. te positioning of objects 431 add button calendar event 34 library items 34 task 34 workarea toolbar 34 column toolbar button 432 content block button 34 folder button 34 screen buttons 48 responding to fields 47 tabs 48 content block 45 row toolbar button 432 address email user editing 409 AddSubMenu 331 alignment cell 545 image 471 table 526 text 430 text remove toolbar button 434 Apple see macintosh approval chain example 98 approvals toolbar button 34 approve all toolbar button 34 button floating toolbar 4 workarea toolbar 34 content 94 from approval report 127 one content block 95 several content blocks 97 approving file document management feature 293 archived content toolbar button 34 archiving definition 79 options 79 restoring archived content 80 assign task button floating toolbar 4 auto hide feature of Smart Desktop 28 B background color applying to text 429 cell applying 539 deleting 540 removing from text 429 table applying 528 deleting 529 background image cell deleting 542 inserting 541 table deleting 531 inserting 530 bidirectional editing 431 blur WebImageFX command 483 bold toolbar option 430 bookmarks 553 border image color 471 thickness 470 border color cell 538 content block meaning 592 table 531 border size cell 535 table 533 brightness WebImageFX command 484 broken links finding 54 bullet toolbar option 430 buttons
385. te within your Web site The following sections explains how to use the content search Selecting a Folder to Begin the Search To search your entire site start with the top level Content folder If you want to limit the search to any folder and its subfolders select it then select the search criteria All folders under the starting folder are included in the search Accessing the Search Content Page To access the search content page follow these steps 1 Navigate to the folder at which you want to begin the search 2 Click the Search button 3 The Search Content Folder screen appears Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 56 The Search Screen The search screen helps you find Ektron CMS400 NET content by specifying the following criteria the kind of content you want to search for example HTML content a search word or words how the search words must match the content in order for a document to be found by the search whether the search words are matched against the content item s title whether the search words are matched against the content s comments an optional range of created or modified dates Only content created or updated within a date range is found by the search Working with Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 57 the las
386. tent This chapter explains how to access the reports folder in your Workarea set criteria that determine the information on the reports and actions you can perform on them See Also Accessing the Reports Folder on page 117 List of Standard Reports on page 118 Common Report Topics on page 119 Accessing the Reports Folder To access the Reports folder follow these steps 1 Log in to your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site and access the Workarea 2 To access the Smart Desktop from anywhere in Ektron CMS400 NET click the button in the top left corner circled below 3 Click the Reports folder Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 118 4 A list of available reports appears NOTE The Approvals Checked Out and Content to Expire Reports are also available from the Workarea The reports are described below List of Standard Reports Report Displays content in this status For more information see Approvals Requiring your approval Approvals Reports on page 127 Checked In Content Checked in Checked In Report on page 129 Checked Out Content Checked out Checked Out Report on page 130 New Content New that is created and saved but never published New Content Report on page 130 Submitted Content Submitted for publication Submitted Report on page 131 Content Workflow Repor
387. tent on page 243 The rest of this section explains everything you need to know to work with Ektron Explorer through the following topics Installing Ektron Explorer on page 234 Displaying Ektron Explorer on page 240 Searching for CMS Content on page 243 Inserting External Files into Ektron CMS400 NET on page 253 Installing Ektron Explorer To install Ektron Explorer follow these steps Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 235 NOTE During the installation you are asked to identify the folder that stores your Ektron CMS400 NET If you don t know ask your system administrator for this information before beginning 1 From the Ektron CMS400 NET workarea click Settings gt Ektron Explorer 2 Click the download button 3 The following window appears Click Run Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 236 4 The following window appears Click Run 5 The following window appear Click Next Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 237 6 You are prompted to enter the location of Ektron CMS400 NET on your computer The default folder appears Press Next if that is correct or enter a different path then press Next Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Rev
388. teps 1 From the Smart Desktop select a report 2 Use the file types pull down to select a file type 3 The screen refreshes and only displays files of that type Sorting and Filtering Content Reports Upon viewing a report s content you have additional options for filtering report data by user and content folder Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 123 The filtering options for each content report are identical The following section uses the Checked In Content report as an example Filter by User To display only content that was checked in by a user click the name of the user in the report display When you do the report redisplays showing only content which that user checked in Filter by Content Folder To display only content checked in to a selected folder click the folder on the report display When you do the report redisplays showing only content in that folder NOTE You can also select a folder and view reports in that folder only See Also Selecting Content by Folder on page 121 Performing an Action on Several Content Items You can perform the following actions on several or all content items in the Approvals Checked in and Checked out reports To select several reports check the relevant checkboxes illustrated below To select all reports click Select All Report Action you can perform Approvals Approve Checked
389. that you want to delete Click Select All to select all boxes Click Clear All to remove all check marks 6 Click the Delete button Reordering Collections List After a collection is created and more than one content item is assigned to it you can reorder the collections list To do so follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 297 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 299 3 Click the Reorder button 4 The Reorder Collection screen appears Working with Collections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 311 5 Click the content whose order you want to change 6 Click the up or down arrow to move the content in either direction 7 Repeat steps five and six until you set the desired order 8 Click the Update button Editing Collection Information To edit information about a collection follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 297 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 299 3 Click the collection whose information you want to
390. the Title field For example you could enter mydocument doc 11 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if it should be searchable 12 If desired add a summary metadata a schedule and comments See Also Adding a Content Summary on page 82 Adding or Editing Metadata on page 86 Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 75 13 If desired you can edit the document s properties See Also Editing a Document s Properties on page 268 14 Check in or submit the content for publishing as you would a content block See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 269 and Adding Content on page 45 Importing Several Office Documents Your computer or network may have several Office documents that you want the Document Management functionality to manage Follow these steps to import several Office documents at once See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 274 and Drag and Drop File Uploading vs the Add Content Buttons on page 291 1 Place all files to be imported in the same folder on your computer or network 2 From the Workarea select the Content folder See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 32 3 Select the CMS folder in which you want to place the documents being imported 4 On the View Contents of Folder screen click the down arrow next to the add dropdown list to view a l
391. the View Content screen to insert supporting information such as summary and metadata Use standard toolbar buttons to perform actions like view history submit for publishing and delete For more information see Working with Managed Files on page 282 Security For the purposes of security documents are treated like other content Your system administrator applies security to each folder determining which user groups can perform which tasks on the content in a folder For more information see the Setting Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 265 Permissions chapter of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Working with Microsoft Office Documents This section explains how to work with Microsoft Office documents through the following subtopics Notes on Working with Microsoft Office Documents on page 265 Creating a New Microsoft Office Document on page 266 Editing a Document s Properties on page 268 Save Check in and Publish on page 269 Importing One Office Document on page 270 Importing Several Office Documents on page 272 Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 274 The Work Offline Option on page 275 Editing an Office Document on page 275 Notes on Working with Microsoft Office Documents If y
392. the title filename and description of any file that was copied to the library To do so follow these steps 1 Access the View File screen as described in Viewing Files on page 218 2 Click the Edit button 3 The Edit File screen appears 4 Change the title file name and or description of the file 5 Click the Update button Overwriting Files If a library file becomes out of date or the wrong version was copied you may replace it with a new version Overwriting files lets you minimize disk space and the number of library files Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 221 NOTE The ability to overwrite a library file is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see an Overwrite button on the View Library Item in Folder screen you do not have permission to overwrite NOTE You can only overwrite images and files The new image or file must have the same file extension as the file being replaced Before You Overwrite an Image When overwriting an image the new image uses the same size dimensions and file extension as the older image Be sure that the two images have the same file extension and size or make the adjustments at each occurrence of the image Before You Overwrite a File Remember all links that point to the overwritten file now point to the new file Overwriting Library Assets To overwrite a library fi
393. them delete them view them etc Creating a Menu in Any Language To create a menu in any language follow these steps 1 Form the Workarea screen click Modules gt Menus Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 356 2 From the language drop down list select the new menu s language 3 Create the menu See Adding a New Menu on page 319 Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 357 Working with Calendars Calendars in Ektron CMS400 NET perform the same function as a paper calendar they keep one or more users informed about upcoming events They can be displayed to all visitors to your Web site and any authorized user can add events to a calendar Typical calendar events could include company meeting reserving a conference room for an interview company holidays deadlines These are only a few uses of calendar events Calendars are versatile and can easily meet all of your needs A sample calendar appears below Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 358 The Calendar Feature is explained through the following topics Understanding Calendars on page 359 Accessing the View Calendar Screen on page 360 Viewing a Calendar on page 365 Tips on Viewing a Calendar on page 367
394. then undo that action and redo it you must press the redo button once for each cell in the row or column Specifying Table Width When you create a table you can set its width by specifying one of the following percentage of the window the table s width varies as a user adjusts the browser size fixed number of pixels the table s width stays the same as a user adjusts the browser size You can also not set a width but instead let information you enter into the table s cells determine its width Manipulating Your Table s Format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 523 NOTE To set the width of a table column adjust the width of one of the cells within the column as described in Specifying the Width of a Cell on page 487 Usually this change affects all other cells in the column Specifying Table Width by Percentage Specify table width by percentage if you want the table to be resized as the user resizes the browser NOTE In order for the table to resize with the browser the Word Wrap attribute must be turned on in all of a table s cells For details see Word Wrap on page 503 For example if you specify that a table is 100 wide and your browser displays 14 inches across when it is maximized the table fills the screen except for the browser border If you resize the browser to half the screen the table will be about 7 wide You still see both co
395. ting by Task Type see Sorting Tasks By Task Type on page 399 Creating a Task via the Task Folder See Also Task Module Toolbar on page 406 To create a task follow these steps 1 Access your Tasks folder as described in Accessing the Tasks Folder on page 382 2 Click the Add button Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 384 IMPORTANT The Add button only appears if your system administrator has granted you permission to add tasks For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Permissions 3 The Add Task screen appears 4 Enter information for the task using the following table Field Description Task Title Enter a title for the task for example Update Content The title appears in the left column of the View Tasks screen Assigned To Your user name appears If you do not have Redirect permissions you cannot assign tasks to other users If you have Redirect permissions your user name appears followed by Select User or Group To assign the task to yourself proceed to the next field To assign the task to someone else click Select User or Group and choose a user or group The user to whom the task is being assigned must have permission to edit the con tent When you complete the screen an email is sent to the selected user or user group informing him of th
396. to view it Add a task Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 397 Assigned To Me All open tasks assigned to you Click on task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Assigned By Me All open tasks you assigned to yourself or others Click on task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Created by Me All open tasks you created Click on task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Assigned to User All open tasks assigned to a user you select Select any user and view all tasks assigned to that user To do so select new user from Assign to User drop down list and click Get Tasks Click on task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Not Started All whose state is Not Started Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Folder Displays these tasks Action you can perform from view screen Managing Tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 398 Active All whose state is Active Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Awaiting Data All
397. ton Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 280 7 The View Contents of Folder screen splits into two sections resembling Windows Explorer The left side displays the folder structure of your PC and its network drives The right side displays files in the selected folder 8 In the left frame select the folder that contains the files you want import 9 In the right frame click the checkbox next to each file you want to import You can only import files in the selected folder at this time Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 281 10 In the Title field you can enter an optional title to apply to all imported documents See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 274 11 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if the content should be searchable 12 Click the Check in or Submit for Publishing button See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 269 and Adding Content on page 45 13 The selected files are imported into the Document Management functionality Editing Open Office Files You can edit any Open Office file within Ektron CMS400 NET When you do the associated Open Office application highlighted in the illustration below appears within the CMS editor area Using the Doc
398. ts Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 119 Common Report Topics The following topics apply to the reports Information on the Reports on page 120 Report Toolbar Options on page 120 Selecting Content by Folder on page 121 Selecting Content by Type on page 122 Sorting and Filtering Content Reports on page 122 Pending Content Approved and pending a start date Content Pending Start Date Report on page 132 Refresh Reminder Report End date has been reached Refresh Reminder Report on page 133 Expired Content Expired date has been reached Expired Content Report on page 134 Content to Expire Will expire within specified number of days Content to Expire Report on page 135 Site Update Activity Content Report Content created or updated in selected folders and within a selected date range Site Update Activity Report on page 136 Asynchronous Log File Report A log report of the Asynchronous process Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual gt Web Alert Feature gt Setting Up the Message Queue and Asynchronous Processor gt Asynchronous Log File Reporting Search Phrase Report Frequency of search terms Search Phrase Report on page 141 Preapproval Groups User groups that have been assigned to folders in order to preapprove content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manua
399. turn all copies of the Software and this License upon notification and demand by Ektron 3 Copyright The Software including any images applets photographs animations video audio music and text incorporated into the Software as well as any accompanying written materials the Documentation is owned by Ektron or its suppliers is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaties and contains confidential information and trade secrets CUSTOMER agrees to protect the confidentiality of the Software and Documentation CUSTOMER agrees that it will not provide a copy of this Software or Documentation nor divulge any proprietary information of Ektron to any person other than its employees without the prior consent of Ektron CUSTOMER shall use its best efforts to see that any user of the Software licensed hereunder complies with this license 4 Limited Warranty Ektron warrants solely that the medium upon which the Software is delivered will be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal proper and intended usage for a period of three 3 months from the date of receipt Ektron does not warrant the use of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free nor that program errors will be corrected This limited warranty shall not apply to any error or failure resulting from i machine error ii Customer s failure to follow operating instructions iii negligence or accident or iv modifications to the So
400. types of content For more information see Approving Declining Content on page 94 Adding Documents to Collections and Menus You can add a document to a collection or a menu just as you would any other type of content For more information see Working with Collections on page 295 and Working with Menus on page 316 Document Reports Ektron CMS400 NET provides several reports that track documents by status Report Displays documents in this status For more information see Approvals Requiring your approval Approvals Reports on page 127 Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 294 Checked In Content Checked in Checked In Report on page 129 Checked Out Content Checked out Checked Out Report on page 130 New Content New that is created and saved but never published New Content Report on page 130 Submitted Content Submitted for publication Submitted Report on page 131 Pending Content Approved and pending a start date Content Pending Start Date Report on page 132 Refresh Reminder Report End date has been reached Refresh Reminder Report on page 133 Expired Content Expired date has been reached Expired Content Report on page 134 Content to Expire Will expire within specified number of days Content to Expire Report on page 135 Report Displays documents
401. ual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 195 Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form In the Mail Properties section of the Edit Form screen you can select email addresses submitted on the form to be inserted into any of these Mail Property fields To From CC So instead of entering a static email address it can be dynamically retrieved from the user s form submission For example you want to retrieve the from field of an email from the information the user enters when completing the form To do this use the OR to addresses in field dropdown lists circled below These lists contain fields that dynamically retrieve data from the submitted form Send data in XML Format A green check means email data will be in a structured XML packet A red X means the email data will be in a standard mailto format For more information see Sending Data as XML in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Forms chapter Field Description Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 196 Note that the To and CC fields can accept fields whose validation type is email address or email address list On the other hand the From field can only accept fields whose validation type is email address that is a single email address To set this up follow these steps 1 Add a form field whose Validation type is Email address or Email address list
402. ual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 494 Description Displays information about an image image name height and width in pixels bit depth See Also Specifying Color Depth on page 508 file format Line Standard Toolbar Button Description Draw a straight line To change a line s size or color right click it after drawing it To use this command click the line command drag the line and release the mouse To change the line s size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 495 Open Standard Toolbar Button Description Select an image for editing The image can be on your computer or a local area network Dialog Box Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 496 To change the type of file that appears in the window click the down arrow circled above to the right of the Files of type field Your system administrator determines which types of files you can edit Oval Standard Toolbar Button Description Draws an oval To use this command click the oval command drag the line and release the mouse To change the oval s line size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Editing Images Ekt
403. ubtree Redisplay both sides of the Explorer screen You often need to do this after making a change to see the results Properties Delete Delete selected folder and all its subfolders New Subfolder Create new folder directly below selected one Language Change the folder s language When you do only content in that language within the selected folder appears in the right frame You must press the browser s refresh button to see content in new language see illustration below Options only appears when folder not selected Menu Option Description For more information see Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 253 Inserting External Files into Ektron CMS400 NET If you installed the Document Management functionality with Ektron CMS400 NET you can add files using the drag and drop technique common in Windows You can quickly and easily insert allowed file types into Ektron CMS400 NET See Also Using the Document Management Functionality on page 261 and Importing Files via Drag and Drop on page 288 The user performing the drag and drop must have permission to add files to the selected folder To drag and drop external files into Ektron CMS400 NET follow these steps 1 Open Ektron Explorer 2 Make sure the Explore tab is selected not the Search tab 3 Resize Explorer to half of the screen 4 Open Windows Explorer and resiz
404. uestion mark in the top right corner Manipulating Your Table s Format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 529 2 A large question mark appears next to your cursor 3 Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Deleting a Table s Background Color To delete a table s background color click the Unassigned box in the Custom Background area of the Insert Table dialog box Manipulating Your Table s Format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 530 Specifying a Background Image for a Table If you want a background image to appear in all table cells use the Background Image field of the Insert Table dialog box Your Webmaster determines which images are available to you To insert a background image 1 Click the down arrow to the right of Select Image A list of background images appears 2 Click the image of your choice 3 Click OK Note that when you apply a background image to a table it applies to the entire table including the borders if the table is larger than the image the image repeats until it fills the table if the image is larger than the table the top left corner of the image aligns with the top left corner of the table The rest of the image fills as much of the table as possible
405. umber Canada A nine digit number in the format nnnnnnnnn Social Insurance Number Canada Required A nine digit number in the format nnnnnnnnn A response is required Telephone number US and Canada A seven or 10 digit number in the format nnnnnnn or nnnnnnnnnn The site visitor can insert separator characters such as dashes between numbers Telephone number US and Canada required A seven or 10 digit number in the format nnnnnnn or nnnnnnnnnn The site visitor can insert separator characters such as dashes between numbers A response is required Option Characteristics of Valid Response Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 170 Fields on the Password Dialog Field Description Descriptive Name Enter a description of the field This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 187 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 171 Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below Default value I
406. ument Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 282 The procedure for editing an Open Office file is the same as the one for editing a Microsoft Office file For details see Editing an Office Document on page 275 Working with Managed Files This section explains how to work with managed files through the following subtopics Creating a New Managed File on page 283 Importing One Managed File on page 283 Importing Several Managed Files on page 284 Editing a Managed File on page 286 Using the Document Management Functionality Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 283 Creating a New Managed File Unlike an Office document you cannot create a managed file within Ektron CMS400 NET Instead you must create it on your computer using the host application After creating the file import it into DM Importing One Managed File To import a managed file into DM follow these steps See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 274 and Drag and Drop File Uploading vs the Add Content Buttons on page 291 1 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the folder in which you want to place the file See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 32 3 Click the down arrow next to the add dropdown list to view the document types you can add
407. use the Select command See Also Select on page 503 If you do not select an area the entire image is copied Create New Standard Toolbar Button Description Lets you create a new image If you are editing an image when you press this command you are asked if you want to save changes to it first By default a new image s bit depth is 24 but you can change it if desired using the color depth command See Also Color Depth on page 487 Crop Standard Toolbar Button Description Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 490 Keeps selected area of an image removes everything outside that area To use the Crop command follow these steps 1 Select an area of an image that you want to keep 2 Press the Crop button 3 Everything outside the selected area is removed Delete Standard Toolbar Button Description Removes a selected area of an image You must select an area before you delete it The deleted area is not saved for later pasting In contrast if you use the Cut command you can later paste the cut area Dimensions Standard Toolbar Button Description Lest you change an image s width and or height which are defined in pixels Maintaining Aspect Ratio Use this check box to change an image s size while maintaining its aspect ratio Editing Images Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revisio
408. utton Menu Insert gt Insert Symbol Keystroke None Launches a special characters and symbols dialog box Choose a character or symbol and click Insert Insert Horizontal Rule Button Menu Insert gt Insert Horizontal Rule Keystroke None Inserts a Horizontal line below the line where the cursor is located Command Access to Command Description Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 586 Insert Table Button Menu Insert gt Insert Table Menu Table gt Insert Table Keystroke None Insert a table When using the Table button a table appears below the button and allows you to choose how many columns and rows you want When using a menu to insert a table the insert table dialog box appears Add Row or Columns Button rows column Menu Table gt Insert Row or Column Keystroke None Add a row or column to an existing table Insert Cell Button None Menu Table gt Insert Cell Keystroke None Inserts a cell where the cursor is located in a table Cells in that row to the right of the new cell are shifted to the right Delete Row Button Menu Table gt Delete Row Keystroke None Deletes the row where the cursor is located Delete Column Button Menu Table gt Delete Column Keystroke None Deletes the column where the cursor is located Delete Cell Button None M
409. utton again This action changes the button to a pressed out condition and terminates the formatting Table of Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists The toolbar buttons and drop down lists on the default toolbar are explained below Five optional toolbars are also available To display one place the cursor on the standard toolbar right click the mouse and select it Toolbar Buttons Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 425 The optional toolbars are explained in these sections Form Elements Toolbar on page 432 Table Elements Toolbar on page 432 Position Objects Options on page 431 Text Direction Options on page 431 Miscellaneous Toolbar on page 434 NOTE The Data Designer feature also has a toolbar For information see Using the Data Designer on page 177 Button Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Function For more information see Cut Ctrl X Remove selected text and graphics Place that data into temporary memory also known as the clipboard If you later cut or copy more information onto the clipboard the new information overwrites the original information Toolbar Buttons Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 426 Copy Ctrl C Copy selected text and graphics into temporary memory Leave selected data where it is If you later cut or copy more in
410. viewing 230 hyperlinks adding 227 adding to content 228 editing 227 viewing 227 images adding to content 229 editing titles 228 extensions 212 overwriting 228 uploading 228 viewing 228 quicklinks adding to content 229 viewing 230 search results include images 71 215 text only 71 215 searching 212 license keys viewing 431 434 lifecycle content block 8 line WebImageFX command 494 link check button 35 links broken finding 54 ListSummary compared with collection and menu 314 lock table or image in position 431 log in 10 log out 12 button floating toolbar 5 M Macintosh support 581 menu items 583 toolbar buttons 583 using editor 581 managed files 282 creating 283 document management feature 264 editing 286 importing one 283 importing several 284 manuals online accessing 412 marked for deletion content 598 menus accessing 318 add new content block via naviga tion link 333 adding new via content folder 320 via Menus module 324 adding to toolbar 437 appearance to content contributor 316 to site visitor 316 changing orientation 442 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 v compared with collection and List Summary 314 creating 440 in any language 355 definition 316 deleting 349 editing 333 via content folder 334 via menus module 334 via navigation link 334 icons 4 items adding content block as 328 adding external hyperlink as 3
411. vorites Folder 7 Click Apply then OK 8 Right click the mouse and click Refresh Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 257 Suppressing the Display of the Favorites Folder To remove the Favorites menu from the left frame follow the procedure in Displaying the Favorites Folder on page 255 but uncheck the Display Favorites Folder checkbox if you turn off the Favorites display then later turn it back on any folders and content that you designated favorites are remembered and will reappear Marking Content Favorite You can add any content item to the Favorites folder To do so follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content 2 Right click the mouse 3 A menu appears 4 Click Add to Favorites Viewing Content in the Favorites Folder To access content in My Favorites folder click the folder When you do its content appears in right frame like other folders NOTE Content in the favorites folder has fewer menu options This is because options that let you move the content among folders cut copy delete etc are inactive within the favorites folder Removing Content from the Favorites Folder To remove any content item from the Favorites folder follow these steps Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 258 1 Open the My Favorites folder 1 Navigate to the content 2 Rig
412. w appear where only one appeared before Merging Two Cells You can merge two cells into one If you merge two cells the new cell contains all of the information from both The new cell s width equals the sum of the two cells that were merged Cells Before Merge Cell After Merge To merge two or more cells follow these steps 1 Select the cells that you want to merge Working with Table Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 550 2 Click the Insert Table button 3 Click Merge Cells from the menu Word Wrap Word Wrap is a text formatting feature of tables It causes text to move down to the next line when the width of the characters on a line equals the column width For example if you set column width to 50 with word wrap turned on a table looks like this If you turn Word Wrap off for the same table you get this result If Word Wrap is turned off text stays on one line until the user entering table text presses lt Enter gt That keystroke causes text to move down to the next line By default all cells have the Word Wrap feature turned on To turn Word Wrap on or off for a cell follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Table from the menu 4 Click Cell Properties from the menu 5 The Cell Properties dialog box appears Click or off the Word Wrap checkbox and click OK Work
413. was created and saved but never published The new content report contains the following information Column Description Title Title of content ID ID number assigned to content by Ektron CMS400 NET Last Editor Last user to edit the content Date Modified Date and time content was last edited Path Folder location of content in Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Column Description Title Title of content ID ID number assigned to content by Ektron CMS400 NET Last Editor Last user to edit the content Content Workflow Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 131 Submitted Report The Submitted Content report displays all content in a submitted state The report contains the following information Viewing Position in Approval Chain While viewing the Submitted Content report you can view the content s position is its approval chain You can use this information to contact the individuals in the chain and ask them to complete their approval To do so follow these steps 1 From the Submitted Content Report click the content s title 2 The View Content page is displayed 3 Click the Properties tab Date Modified Date and time content was last edited Path Folder location of content in Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Column Description Column Description Title Title of content ID ID number assigned to content by Ektron CMS400 NET Last Edit
414. within the quicklink when content is moved See your system administrator for help with the web config file NOTE This action can only be performed on quicklinks Field Description Title Title given to the hyperlink or form by the user who added it or last edited it URL Link URL link for the quicklink or form Library ID ID number assigned automatically by Ektron CMS400 NET when the quicklink or form was originally added Parent Folder Parent folder that the quicklink or form belongs to Users need permissions to this folder to be able to access the quicklink or form Last User to Edit Last user that made changes to the quicklink or form Last Edit Date The date the quicklink or form was last edited Date Created The date and time the quicklink or form was originally added to the Ektron CMS400 NET library Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 231 When content is moved in Ektron CMS400 NET its quicklink does not get changed After it is moved you need to update the default template called in the content s quicklink To update the default template for one or more quicklinks follow these steps 1 In the library access the quicklinks folder containing quicklinks you want to update 2 Click the Update Quicklinks button 3 The Update URL Link Template Quicklinks screen is displayed 4 Check the quicklinks you want to update NOTE Check the box
415. wnload your product Redirect to an action page and forward form data See Redirect to an Action Page and Forwarding Form Data on page 151 Report on the form See Making Form Results Available to Site Users on page 152 10 Click the Next button 11 This screen informs you that you have finished entering the basic information about the survey and you need to click the Done button to enter the survey s content This procedure is described in Creating a Form s Content on page 155 Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 208 Library Folder The library folder stores images files quicklinks and hyperlinks that can be inserted into editor content Before you can insert them into content you must copy them from your computer to a larger file server computer that everyone editing your site can access This chapter explains how to copy such files and insert them into Web content through the following topics Terms Used in this Chapter on page 208 Accessing The Library on page 209 Library Folder Properties on page 211 Searching the Library on page 212 Files on page 215 Hyperlinks on page 227 Images on page 228 Quicklinks and Forms on page 229 Terms Used in this Chapter An image is any graphic file which can include illustrations and photos Common im
416. y Management screen appears 3 The screen displays the following settings Your system administrator controls these settings Searching the Library You can search the library to find items when you only know some information about them For example you know that an image s name includes Ektron but don t know its filename or folder Field Description Image Extensions File extensions of images that can be copied to the library folder For example gif and jpg Image Upload path Physical Path The folder to which library images are moved when you insert them into Ektron CMS400 NET File Extensions Extensions of files that can be copied to this library folder For example doc and pdf FIle Upload path Physical Path The folder to which library files are moved when you insert them into Ektron CMS400 NET Library Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 213 To search the library first select the folder in which you want to begin the search The search only considers files in that folder and its child folders To search the entire library begin by selecting the Library root folder Next click the Search button from the library toolbar When you do a search screen appears with several fields that let you narrow your search The fields are described below Field Description Keywords Specify one or more keywords that the search will use The search looks for keywo
417. you can also apply an image to individual cells see Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 493 make sure that the image does not obscure user s ability to read the table text Manipulating Your Table s Format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 531 Deleting a Background Image 1 Move the cursor to any cell on the table and right click the mouse 2 Click Table Properties from the menu 3 Select the value in the Background Image field and press lt Backspace gt 4 Click OK Setting Table Borders You can specify a border color or size for your table Assigning Border Color A table border is the line that separates the table from the rest of your Web page By default table borders are gray You can change the color of table borders Manipulating Your Table s Format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 5 5 for NET 2 0 Revision 1 532 If you want a table s border to disappear set it to the same color as the page s background color This technique is often used to format text on a Web page Assigning a Cell Border Color Each cell also has a border that separates it from the other cells and the table border By default a cell s border color matches the table border However you can individually change a cell border color see Setting a Cell s Border Color on page 490 To assign a color to your table s border click the

Ektron CMS400.NET User Manual - Ektron Product Documentation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents